P O S I T I O N I N G

S Y S T E M S

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help

Part Number Rev

©Copyright Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. January, 2012

All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. The information contained herein may not be used, accessed, copied, stored, displayed, sold, modified, published, or distributed, or otherwise reproduced without the e pressed written consent from Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc.

ECO#3211

TOC

Table of Contents
Preface .................................................................. xix
Terms and !onditions ...................................................... i "anual !onventions ........................................................ ii
Chapter 1

Intr d!cti n .......................................................... 1"1
Introduction "A#N$T %ield .......................................... &'& !onnections ..................................................................... &'( )ome screen .................................................................... &'( )elp *ptions ................................................................... &'+
Chapter #

Mana$in$ % &' ..................................................... #"1
,ob folder ........................................................................ ('& New ,ob .................................................................... ('( *pen ,ob ................................................................... ('.elete ,ob ................................................................. ('+ ,ob Info ..................................................................... ('/ 0rowse ....................................................................... ('1
Chapter (

C nfi$!rin$ % &' .................................................. ("1
!onfigure folder .............................................................. -'& !onfiguring a New ,ob .................................................... -'( Select Survey !onfiguration .................................... -'( !onfigurations .................................................... -'!oordinate System ................................................... -'+ 2nits ......................................................................... -'+ .isplay ..................................................................... -'1 Alarms ...................................................................... -'3 #PS Survey !onfigurations ............................................. -'4 Receiver "a5e .......................................................... -'4
P/N 7010-0492

i

Table of Contents

RT6 Survey ............................................................... -'7 0ase Receiver ............................................................ -'7 0ase Peripherals ......................................................... -'&8 Receiver Settings ....................................................... -'&& Radio .......................................................................... -'&& "odem Register ......................................................... -'&( Radio Parameters ....................................................... -'&( 0ase "ulticast ..................................................... -'&!ell Phone ........................................................... -'&.igital 2)% ......................................................... -'&%)7&/ Plus .......................................................... -'&+ Int Satel Parms .................................................... -'&+ Internal )iPer 9ite ............................................... -'&+ Pacific !rest Radio Parms ................................... -'&+ 2)% "odem ....................................................... -'&/ Satel Radio Parms ............................................... -'&/ Rover !."A Parms ........................................... -'&/ Rover !.P. Parms ............................................ -'&/ Rover #PRS Parms ............................................. -'&1 Rover Receiver .......................................................... -'&1 Position for ##A ....................................................... -'&3 R$'S& %)7&/ Repeater ............................................. -'&3 Rover Receiver Peripherals ....................................... -'&4 *utput N"$A ..................................................... -'&7 9ist of N"$A messages ..................................... -'&7 mm#PS: ............................................................. -'(8 9aser !onfiguration ............................................ -'(8 Survey Parameters ..................................................... -'(& Sta5eout Parameters ................................................... -'(( .efining names for the sta5ed points .................. -'(+ Setting notes for the sta5ed points ...................... -'(+ Sta5ed Point Icon ................................................ -'(/ !olor Palette ........................................................ -'(/ Advanced Parameters ................................................ -'(/ "iscellaneous ;#PS< Parameters .............................. -'(3 RT6 Settings ............................................................. -'(3 Networ5 RT6 ................................................................... -'(4 "odem !onnect .................................................. -'(7

Table of Contents

"odem .ialup Info ............................................ "odem Internet Info ........................................... 9ogin Info ........................................................... "odem Receiver Info ......................................... Networ5 .#PS .......................................................... Real Time .#PS ....................................................... !onfig= 0eacon ................................................... S0AS Setup ........................................................ !onfig= *mniSTAR ............................................ #eneric N"$A ......................................................... PP Static .................................................................... PP Setup .............................................................. *ccupation > Initiali?ation Times ....................... PP 6inematic ............................................................. PP .#PS ................................................................... *ptical Survey !onfigurations ........................................ Instrument ................................................................. !onnection mode ...................................................... !able ................................................................... Survey Parameters ..................................................... Survey Parameters .............................................. Sta5eout Parameters .................................................. Point Properties ................................................... "iscellaneous ;*ptical< Parameters ......................... Search>Trac5 ;Topcon< .............................................. Search>Trac5 ;So55ia< ............................................... "onitor *ptions ........................................................ !oordinate System ........................................................... NA.4- .atum .etails .............................................. Pro@ections ................................................................. #rid>#round Parameters ........................................... !ompute Rotation ............................................... !ompute A?imuth>0earing ................................. !ustom Pro@ections ................................................... !reating a !ustom Pro@ection ............................. !ustom Pro@ection Specifications ....................... !ustom .atums ......................................................... !reating a !ustom .atum ..................................

-'(7 -'(7 -'-8 -'-8 -'-8 -'-& -'-( -'-( -'--'--'-+ -'-+ -'-/ -'-/ -'-/ -'-1 -'-1 -'-1 -'-3 -'-3 -'-4 -'-7 -'-7 -'-7 -'+& -'+( -'+( -'+-'++ -'+/ -'+1 -'+1 -'+3 -'+3 -'+3 -'+4 -'+4 -'+7

P/N 7010-0492

iiii ii

Table of Contents

!ustom .atum Specifications ............................. -'+7 !ustom $llipsoids ...................................................... -'+7 !reating a !ustom $llipsoid ............................... -'/8 #eoids ........................................................................ -'/8 Adding a #eoid ................................................... -'/& #lobal Settings ................................................................ -'/& ,ob 0ac5up Settings ........................................................ -'/( !onfiguring "enus ......................................................... -'/!odes Settings ................................................................. -'/+ !onfiguring Sta5e Reports .............................................. -'// Report !onfiguration ................................................. -'// $nterprise !onfigure ....................................................... -'/1
Chapter )

$ changing .ata ..................................................................... +'& $ port To ,ob ................................................................... +'( Select ,ob ................................................................... +'( $ port .ata To ,ob .................................................... +'( %ilter Points 0y Range and !ode;s< .................... +'Select *b@ects to $ port ...................................... +'+ Select !odes %or %ilter ........................................ +'+ $ port Status .............................................................. +'/ Import %rom ,ob ............................................................... +'/ Import .ata %rom ,ob ................................................ +'/ Select *b@ects to Import ...................................... +'1 %ilter Points 0y Range and !ode;s< .................... +'1 Import Status .............................................................. +'3 $ port To %ile .................................................................. +'3 $ port .ata To %ile ................................................... +'4 !ode Style Setup ................................................. +'7 !ode Style Separators ......................................... +'7 !ontrol !odes ...................................................... +'7 %ile 2nits ............................................................. +'&8 Select .ata %or $ port To %ile ........................... +'&8

i$

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

Table of Contents

Select %ilters %or Points ...................................... Settings %or Te t !ustom %ormats ..................... Select %ields %or !ustom %ormats ...................... 9atitude>9ongitude Record %ormat .................... Setup .A%>.B# Settings %or $ port ............... Import %rom %ile .............................................................. Setup Settings %or Import ................................... Import of "ultiple .ata Types ................................. 9ist of Imported *b@ects ..................................... $ port To -."! ............................................................. Import %rom -."! ......................................................... $nterprise 2pload ............................................................ $nterprise .ownload ....................................................... .uplicate ob@ects .............................................................
Chapter *

+'&8 +'&& +'&& +'&& +'&& +'&( +'&+'&+ +'&+ +'&+ +'&/ +'&1 +'&1 +'&1

Import .ata %rom %ile .............................................. +'&-

!hatting .................................................................................. /'&
Chapter +

$diting ,ob .ata ..................................................................... $dit Points ........................................................................ Point Info ................................................................... 9inewor5 Pac5age ..................................................... !ode ' Attributes ....................................................... "ulti'!ode .......................................................... Point !hec5 ............................................................... 9ayer>Style ................................................................ BA ............................................................................ Photo Note ................................................................. Photo Note Pop up menu .................................... !ompass !alibration ........................................... Image !apture ..................................................... PT9 ............................................................................ Point !hec5 ......................................................... %ind by Point ...................................................... %ind by !ode ......................................................
P/N 7010-0492

1'& 1'( 1'1'1'+ 1'/ 1'1 1'1 1'3 1'3 1'3 1'4 1'7 1'7 1'7 1'&8 1'&8

$

........... 1'&4 9ayer ................................................................................... 1'(& Angle Sets Report ....... 1'(3 Add>$dit Road ................................... 1'&& !ode ................................................................................ 1'&$dit Area ................................................................................ 1'&+ Point 9ists ....................................................................... 1'(/ Add>$dit Roads ..................... 1'&7 *b@ects ........ 1'&& Attributes ... 1'(+ Roads ...................................................................... 1'&7 !olor Palette .......................... 1'(( Ciew Sta5e Report .......................................................................................... 1'(( $dit Sta5e Report ........................................................................................ata ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1'(4 )ori?ontal Alignment .................................................... 1'&( "ultiple !ode Strings .......................................................................................................................................................... 1'(& $dit Raw .....................Table of Contents !hec5 Points .................. 1'&9inewor5 .............. 1'&1 Select Points 0y Range .......................................................................... 1'(4 9ong Section .................................................................... 1'(Roads %older ................ 1'(1 Certical Alignment ................................................................. 1'(/ Start Point .................... 1'&!ontrol !ode .............................................................................. 1'&3 Select Points by !ode Strings ... 1'&3 Point 9ist !hec5 .............. 1'(& 9ist of Sta5e Reports ............................................................................... 1'(7 $i MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ................................................................................................................................................. 1'&4 9ayers ..................... 1'&3 Select Points by !ode ........................................................................................ 1'(Properties ........... 1'&& !ode ' Attributes ...... 1'&8 !ut Sheet ................... 1'&/ Point 9ist ............................................. 1'&4 Style ............................................................................................. 1'&+ Points in Area .................... 1'(0ac5ground Images .................................................................. 1'&7 Setup Selection ......................................................................................................................... 1'&3 Select Points by Radius ...................................................................................

................................ 1'-( Certical Alignment ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1'-8 Spiral ....................... !alculate !urves ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Inverse Point to Point 9ist ..................................... Two Point Inverse .................................................... 3'7 PI D Tangents ................... 1'-/ !alculate Road Points ..... Inverse Point to 9ine ....... 1'+8 String Set ................ 1'-7 A'Sect Template ................................. 1'-+ A'Section .................................................................................................. Point in . 1'-A'Section .................................................................................... 1'-/ Right>9eft *ffset Points Params .......... !alculate .................................................. 1'-& Intersection Point ......................... 3'( 3'3'+ 3'/ 3'1 3'3 3'4 !urve Solution .......... 1'+& Add>$dit String Set .................................................... 1'-3 )igh>9ow Positions ........................................................................................ 1'+( Chapter ....................................................................................................... 1'-3 Certical alignments ..... 1'-7 Segment ................................................................................................................................ 1'-!urve ......................... 3'& !alculate Inverse ... 3'&8 Three Pt !urve ........................................................................................................................Table of Contents 9ine . 1'-1 )ori?ontal alignments ............................................................ Inverse Point to !urve ............. 1'+8 A'Section Set ........................ 1'-4 A'Section Templates ....... 1'-( Certical #rade ..........................................irection ................................................................................... 3'& !alculate %older ................................. 3'&& P/N 7010-0492 $ii ........................... 1'-/ !enterline Point Params ......... 1'-8 !urve ................................................ 1'+& Add>$dit Road String Alignment Pair ........................................

.............................................................................................. 3'(& !omp Area ...................................................... 3'(/ !alculate *ffsets ...................................T" ..................................... 3'-( Ad@ustment !lose ............................................. 3'-4 #eneral Icons ....... 3'(7 Rotate ........... 3'(4 !alculate Ad@ust ... 3'(( 6nown Area ' 9ine ..................................................... 3'-& (.......... 4'- $iii MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ...................................................................... 3'(1 !urve D *ffsets ........................................ 3'(!orner Angle ........................................................ 3'&1 !alculator ................... 4'Eoom In>*ut>Bindow ................................................................................................................ 3'&7 !alculate Area ................................................................................. 3'-1 !alculate ............................................ Transform Parameters ........................................................... 3'&/ !alculator ........ 3'(& 6nown Area ' )inge ... 3'-3 !reating .. 3'-& Traverse Ad@ustment .............................................................Table of Contents Radius D Points ....................................T" ..................... 4'& "ap .................................. 3'(3 Road *ffset ................................................ 3'-Point Pair Info ............................ 3'-+ 0S Point ................ 3'-+ Traverse !alc ............. 4'( "ap Properties .................................................. 3'+( Chapter - "ap ..................................................................... 3'(7 Translate ......................................... Transform ....................................................... 3'(4 Station D *ffsets ......................................................................................... 3'&Intersection ............................................................................. 3'-( Ad@ustment Results .............................................................................. 3'-8 Scale .............................................................................................. 3'+& !ontouring ...............................................................T" Columes .......................... 3'-(...........................T" ..................................................................................................................... 3'-3 ........................................ 3'(/ 9ine D *ffset ............................ 3'+& $diting 0oundary ....................................................................................

................................. 7'Networ5 !onnection Settings ............................. &8'/ "ulti 0ase Status ...................................Table of Contents Eoom All .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... &8'& Setup folder ....................... 7'& Bluetooth ................ 7'& #eneral !onnection Settings .... &8'& Setup #PS folder ................................................................................................................................................... &8'&8 7010-0492 i% P/N ................................................................. 7'& !onnections .. &8'4 "ission Planning Setting ..................................................................................................... 4'Chapter ............................................ &8'&8 Satellite Number ............................................................... &8'& Status ........ 4'Eoom 0y Point .......... &8'3 SCs .................................................. &8'System ........................ &8'3 "ission Planning ........................................................................................................ !onnections ...... &8'( Status pop'up menu .................................................................................................................. &8'+ Solution type .......................................... 9-2 Authentication ....................................................................................................... 7'+ Chapter 10 Setting up #PS Survey ................................................. ..................................................................... &8'/ 9og )istory ............. &8'1 Scatter Plot ............... &8'7 Satellite 9ist .................................................. &8'( Position ........ ..................... 9-3 Bluetooth Connection .......... 9-2 Device Discovery ........................................................ 9-3 $nterprise !onnection ...................

.........Table of Contents P.......*P ....................................................................................... &8'&8 % MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ...................... &8'&8 Start 0ase ...............

......................................................................... &8'(8 %ield !alibration .......................... &8'(& 2pdate !alibration ............................... &8'(+ Session Setup .......................................................... &&'& Survey #PS ............................................................................................................................................. &&'Auto Topo ........... &8'&7 Resect mm#ps: Sensor ......................................ata ............................ata ..................................................... &8'&3 Transmitter Position ............ &8'(Settings ............... &8'(( 6nown Point *ffset .......................... &8'(Sessions ..........................................................................ata .................. &8'&+ 9ocali?ation Results ............... &8'(/ Chapter 11 #PS Survey .............. &8'(( mm#PS: *ptions .............................................................................................................................. &8'(& 6nown Point ................................................ &8'&+ Simulator ............................................... &&'& Survey folder .................................................................................................................................................................................... &8'&& Start 0ase pop'up menu ........................................................................ &8'&( 9ocali?ation ................................. &&'( ....................................... &8'&1 Transmitter Position ..... &8'&4 Resect mm#ps: Resect .....................................................Table of Contents "ulti 0ase ................................................................ &8'&/ 6PI Position ................. &8'&4 Sensor .......................................................................................... &8'&/ 6nown Point Initiali?ation ........................................................................ &&'"ap ............ &8'(+ Sessions . &8'&7 .........................................................................................................................................................................................ata ........................................ &&'Raw ...................................................... &&'+ P/N 7010-0492 %i ................................................................................................................................................. &&'& Topo ....... &8'&1 mm#PS Initiali?ation ............................................. &8'&& Static *ccupation ........................................ &8'(8 Transmitter .......................................................................... &8'&( Add 9ocali?ation Point ...........

..........istance *ffset ..................ir>Rev ........... &-'+ )A *ffset .........................Total Station< folder ...... &-'1 )idden Point ...................... &&'3 Ref 9ine ..................................................... &&'/ !ross Section ................................................................................................ &('+ Robotic Arrows ............................................................................................................................. &-'*ffsets ... &('+ Resection ...........................................irect>Reverse ................. &&'1 Tape ................... &('/ Resection *ptions ............ &&'4 .... &-'& Survey *ptical ......................... &-'Ang>dist Sets'........................................................................... &-'( Sideshot'..................................................................................... &('/ Chapter 1( *ptical Survey .............................................................................. &('& BS Survey .............................................................................. &&'7 9aser Setup ..............Table of Contents Raw #ps: ..................................................................................................................................................................................... &-'3 Two 9ine Intersection .......................................................................................................................................................................... &&'7 "ap ..................................................................................................................................................................... &-'& Topo Survey ........................................... &-'3 9ine and !orner .......................................... &-'/ ............................................................................................................irect .....ata ............................................................ &('Remote !ontrol .....imension ................................................... &&'&8 Chapter 1# *ptical Survey Setup .................................... &('( !hec5 0ac5sight ......... &-'Station and *ffset .................................................................................................... &&'1 %ind Station .... &-'4 %ii MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .................................................................... &&'/ !ross Section ........................................ &-'( Sideshot'.................................................. &&'4 A'Section ............................ &-'/ )?>Ct Angle *ffset . &&'+ #ps *ffsets ....................... &&'7 PT9 "ode ........................................................... &('& Setup *ptical .Total Station< .......

................Table of Contents 9ine and *ffset .................. &+'& !rteate 9evel Run ........................................................................................................................... &-'7 Auto Topo ................ &+'Settings ... &-'&( %ind Station ................................... &-'&4 Scan .............. &-'&+ ASect'................................... &-'&8 $levation ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... &/'& Sta5e folder .............................................................................................................. &-'&/ Remote Rotate ............. &+'& 9evel Run ...................................... &-'&+ Tape ......................................................................................................................................................................................... &+'Chapter 1* Sta5ing ............................................................... &-'&1 Scanning ......................... &-'&7 Interval .. &+'( Two Peg Test ............. &-'&7 $stimate Time ........................................................................ &-'&"issing 9ine .....................................................imension ...................................... &+'( Two Peg Test Results ............................irect>Reverse ........... &-'&& "ultiple 0ac5sight ................................................................................................................................. &-'(( Chapter 1) 9evel Survey .. &-'7 Plane and !orner .................................................. &-'&4 *rientation Results ..................................... &-'&3 Ciew Scan ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... &-'(8 "onitor *ptions ................. &-'(8 "onitor ... &+'& Shots ...................... &-'&1 Remote Scanning ................................................................................................................................................................................................."ultiple< ..................................... &+'( Sta5e SS ............... &-'&4 *rientation ..................................................................................................... &-'&7 Scan .................. &-'&+ Reference 9ine ..................................................................................................................................................................... &-'(& "onitor Pointlist ................................................... &-'&( "ulti Set Page ................................ &/'& %ii MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ......................

.................... Sta5e Real'Time Road ...................................................................... Sta5e pop'up menu .......................................................................................................... Sta5e Point 9ist ...............................................ata Ciew ....... Sta5e 9ine ................................... Sta5e 9ine D *ffsets ............................................................................................................. Ciews ...................... Surface 0oundary .9 ................. Sta5eout $levation ...........................9 Point 9ist ............................................................................................................................................................................................. Station D *ffset ........ Sta5e Point in ...............................................................................9 ................................................... Sta5e .............................ata %ields ........................... Sta5e ...........................................................T" ............ Transition Points ........................... "ap Ciew .............................................................................. Intersection D *ffsets > 9ine ( .................................. Sta5e !urve .......................................................................... Intersection D *ffsets > 9ine & ............................................. ..............................................................Table of Contents Sta5e Point ...................T" .. Surface Ciew . Normal Ciew ............. Sta5e Surface ............................................................... Sta5e ............... Sta5e ................ Sta5e Road ................................................................................................... &/'( &/'&/'&/'+ &/'/ &/'1 &/'1 &/'1 &/'1 &/'1 &/'3 &/'3 &/'3 &/'3 &/'3 &/'4 &/'4 &/'7 &/'&8 &/'&8 &/'&& &/'&& &/'&( &/'&&/'&+ &/'&+ &/'&/ &/'&1 &/'&1 &/'&3 &/'&4 &/'&7 &/'&7 &/'(8 &/'(& &/'(& &/'(( &/'(( P/N 7010-0492 %iii ......................... Sta5e Spiral D *ffset .......... *verhead Ciew ....................................................................................................................................... !ross Section Ciew .................................. Sta5e *ffsets ................................................................. *pen .............9 Point .......................... Sta5eout ....... Certical *ffset ........................................................................................... Three Pt !urve ......Slope< ....................................................... Sta5e Surface $levation .................................................. Sta5e !urve D *ffsets ........................... Sta5e Surface Road .......................................................................................................................................... ............... Sta5e Road ..........irection ...............................

....... &/'(7 Store Point ......................... A'& 9ocali?ation in "A#N$T %ield ..................................................... &/'(1 .................................................................... A'/ Two'point 9ocali?ation .................. &/'(1 Station D *ffsets ......... &/'(4 ...................................................................................................................................... &/'(+ Sta5e Slope Alignment .......................................... &/'(3 Set References > Surface and Point References ................. &/'-8 Select Calue ........ A'3 Importing the coordinate sets to "A#N$T %ield @ob A'7 Setting the desired pro@ection ..... &/'(+ Sta5e 9inewor5 ................................................ &/'(7 ............................ A'& 0asic !oncept of 9ocali?ation ..... &1'& Apps folder ........................ A'1 Three'point 9ocali?ation .............................................................. &/'(7 Sta5e Tab ..ob ......... A'&( Importing 9ocali?ation ...........................................esign Pt>9ayer ............ A'1 Performing 9ocali?ation .................... A'&/ %i$ MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ....................... &/'-& Chapter 1+ Applications ......................... &/'(4 Initial Point Name .........................................................esign Tab ................atum A'+ 9ocali?ation with any Predefined or !reated Pro@ection A'+ *ne'point locali?ation ...................... &/'(Sta5e Slope ..........ata Tab ........................ &/'-8 *ffset from !P ................................................. A'( 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on B#S4+ A'9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on any ................................................................................. &/'(7 ............................................................................................................................... A'&& !reating 9ocali?ation Points ..................................................................................................Table of Contents Sta5e Road Alignment ...............ata to *ther ..................................................................................... A'&#rid to #round Transformation ........................................................................................................................................... A'&+ !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to a Point ..................... &1'& Appendi A )ow To ........................ A'&& Adding the #eoid file ...................esign *ffsets .................................................................

................................................. A'-8 *ffset 9ine ..................... A'-& A?imuth and *ffsets ........................................... A'(/ 9ine and !orner ...... A'-+ P/N 7010-0492 %$ .................. A'(( ....................................... A'(8 *ffsets for TS Survey .........................................Table of Contents $ ample of using F*rigin PtF ....................................istance *ffset ............................................................. A'&1 !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to the *rigin of #rid System ... A'-( *ffset 9aser ................................................................................................................. A'(4 Plane and !orner ................... A'(7 *ffsets for #PS Survey ................................... A'(& )ori?ontal>Certical Angle *ffset ...................................................... A'(+ Two 9ines Intersection ............ A'()idden Point ........................................... A'(1 9ine and *ffset ............................... A'&4 *ffsets in "A#N$T %ield .................................... A'(8 )ori?ontal Angle *ffset ...............................................................................................

Table of Contents %$i MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

time and money. copy.GTPSH< for owners of Topcon products. store. content. publish. or allow any third party access to. survey product or accessory . P/N 7010-0492 2-%i% . Ter/' and C nditi n' 0SE This product is designed to be used by a professional. any graphics. COPY1IGHT All information contained in this "anual is the intellectual property of. access.the GTerms and !onditionsH< NOTICE NOTICE Please read these Terms and Conditions carefully.the GSoftwareH< to be used with the Product and its use is sub@ect to these terms and conditions . All rights are reserved.the G"anualH< have been prepared by Topcon Positioning Systems. coordination and arrangement by TPS. Inc.P&efa'e P&efa'e Than5 you for purchasing your Topcon receiver. The user should have a good 5nowledge of the safe use of the product and implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local government protection agency for both private use and commercial @ob sites. distribute. The information and data in this "anual are a valuable asset of TPS and are developed by the e penditure of considerable wor5. display. create derivative wor5s of.the GProductH<. information or data in this "anual without TPSJ e press written consent and may only use such information for the care and operation of your Product. and copyrighted material of TPS. The materials available in this manual . and are the result of original selection. Iou may not use. modify. sell. . This "anual is designed to assist owners with the use of software .

T1A2EMA13S TopconK. 2ISC4AIME1 OF 5A11ANTY $A!$PT %*R ANI BARRANTI$S IN AN APP$N. 02T AR$ N*T 9I"IT$. TPS . ANI A!!*"PANIIN# S*%TBAR$ AR$ PR*CI. 9*SS *% TI"$.$STR2!TI*N *% . IN ANI $C$NT. Topcon 9in5L. P$R%*R"AN!$ *R 2S$ *% T)IS "AT$RIA9.ATA. BARRANTI *% "$R!)ANTA0I9ITI *R %ITN$SS %*R ANI PARTI!29AR 2S$ *R P2RP*S$. 9*SS *% PR*%IT.IS!9AI"$.A"A#$S *R !*STS IN!2RR$.IA *R A BARRANTI !AR.$NTA9 *R !*NS$N2$NTIA9 . T*. TPS S)A99 )AC$ N* 9IA0I9ITI %*R . 4ICENSE AG1EEMENT 2se of the Software and any other computer programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS website . )$R$INM N*R %*R IN!I. IN!*NC$NI$N!$. ITS .A"A#$S R$S29TIN# %R*" T)$ %2RNIS)IN#.ISTRI02T*RS S)A99 N*T 0$ 9IA09$ %*R T$!)NI!A9 *R $.the GSoftwareH< to be used with a Topcon Product constitutes 2-%% MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . A!!*"PANIIN# T)$ PR*. *R 9*SS *% T)$ PR*. and Topcon Positioning SystemsL are trademar5s or registered trademar5s of TPS. T)$ PR*. SACIN#S *R R$C$N2$. BindowsK and ActiveSyncK are registered trademar5s of the "icrosoft !orporation.A"A#$S IN!92. *ther product and company names mentioned herein may be trademar5s of their respective owners.ITI*N.$.A"A#$S *R *T)$RBIS$ T* I*2 *R ANI *T)$R P$RS*N *R $NTITI IN $A!$SS *% T)$ P2R!)AS$ PRI!$ %*R T)$ P*R.2!T. T)$ S*%TBAR$. Satel is a trademar5 of Satel.IS!9AI"S ANI I"P9I$.H T)$R$ AR$ N* *T)$R BARRANTI$S. IN A. TopS2RCL. !9AI"S 0I *T)$RS.2!T.2!TJS 2S$.2!TS *R S*%TBAR$. GAS'IS. 9*SS *R . TPS AN. Inc. . and is used by Topcon Positioning Systems. S2!) . So55ia !orporation and the names of So55ia !orporation products referenced herein are either trademar5s or registered trademar5s of So55ia !orporation. Inc. AN..$. under license. *y. TPS IS N*T R$SP*NSI09$ *R 9IA09$ %*R . *R T)$ PR*.IT*RIA9 $RR*RS *R *"ISSI*NS !*NTAIN$. 0luetoothK is a registered trademar5 owned by 0luetooth SI#. Topcon ToolsL. )iPerK. IN !*NN$!TI*N BIT) *0TAININ# S20STIT2T$ PR*. *R ANI *T)$R !*STS.2!T. T)IS "AN2A9.2!T.

acceptance of these Terms and !onditions in this "anual and an agreement to abide by these Terms and !onditions.isclaimer of Barranty and limitation of liability<. non'transferable license to use such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with a single Product or single computer. In the event you become legally compelled to disclose any of the !onfidential Information.&< bac5up copy of the Software. If these license terms are not acceptable. the G!onfidential InformationH< are the confidential and proprietary information of TPS. TPS may terminate the license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or !onditions. copyright and other intellectual property rights in and to the Software belong to TPS. The user is granted a personal. . Iou agree to treat TPSJ !onfidential Information with a degree of care no less stringent than the degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade secrets. 5E6SITE7 OTHE1 STATEMENTS No statement contained at the TPS website . Nothing in this paragraph shall restrict you from disclosing !onfidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or appropriate to operate or care for the Product. Iou agree to destroy the Software and manual upon termination of your use of the Product. you shall give TPS immediate notice so that it may see5 a protective order or other appropriate remedy. SAFETY Improper use of a Topcon Product can lead to in@ury to persons or property and>or malfunction of the Product. Iou may ma5e one . Iou may not assign or transfer the Software or this license without the e press written consent of TPS. All ownership. Iou may terminate the license at any time by destroying the Software and "anual. its contents and the Software . .collectively.including the Software 9icense Agreement. The Product should only be repaired by authori?ed TPS warranty service centers.or any other website< or in any other advertisements or TPS literature or made by an employee or independent contractor of TPS modifies these Terms and !onditions . CONFI2ENTIA4ITY This "anual. non'e clusive. Such employees must also 5eep the !onfidentiality Information confidential. This license is effective until terminated. the Software may not be copied or reproduced. *therwise. return any unused Software and the "anual.

Man!al C n8enti n' This manual uses the following conventions= $ ample File E it Enter Notes Topo T(P $ planation tap the %ile menu and tap $ it.o* 'onfi. or canceled. MISCE44ANEO0S The above Terms and !onditions may be amended. the laws of the State of !alifornia.2sers should review and heed the safety warnings in the manual accompanying the Product.ste+! NOTICE NOTICE Supplementary information that can have an affect on system operation. Indicates the button or 5ey labeled $nter. Indicates a field on a dialog bo or screen. Indicates the name of a dialog bo or screen TIP )*##le+enta&. 2-%%ii MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . measurements. modified. and construed in accordance with. at any time by TPS. personal safety. info&+ation t-at 'an -el# . without reference to conflict of laws. system performance. The above Terms and !onditions will be governed by. superseded.*&e/ +aintain/ o& set *# a s. or a tab within a dialog bo or screen.

The activated "A#N$T %ield will prompt you to establish !onnections with the . you need to activate it.emo mode.C-a#te& 1 (nt&o *'tion Intr d!cti n MAGNET Field "A#N$T %ield is a field application of the "A#N$T software system that also includes the office and the web service . To wor5 with a fully featured "A#N$T %ield. which allows you to store up to five points. refer to the application )elp. you can clear the Activate MAGNET Field now chec5 bo at the end of the "A#N$T %ield installation to wor5 in . the application will run in . Bhen the connection with the device is established. %or help using the other applications of the "A#N$T software system. .emo mode. This )elp provides information for the "A#N$T %ield application. . Also. the )ome screen is displayed."A#N$T $nterprise< applications.evice before opening a @ob and with the $nterprise pro@ect to e change data. which guides you through the process. you are prompted to activate the Product using the Activation "anager wi?ard. If you cancel activation.ata from the field and office applications can be used by "A#N$T $nterprise for graphical representation of the pro@ect on the $nterprise #oogle map. After successfully installing the application on the device. NOTICE NOTICE Once activated MA NET !ield does not re"uire a ne# activation after updatin$.

1-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . *n each subseOuent "A#N$T %ield startup. $dit $dits e isting @ob data.(nt&o *'tion C nnecti n' Bhen "A#N$T %ield runs for the first time. files and enterprise pro@ects. Then you can create a @ob with a reOuired configuration to wor5. the !onnections dialog runs for the current @ob.ob "anages @obs. clic5 the )ome button to open the )ome screen for the default @ob. !onfigure "anages @ob configurations. $ change $ changes data between an active @ob and other @obs. !hat !hats with online recipients. H /e 'creen Clic9 an ic n t pen the f lder r exec!te the c //and: . !alculate !alculates various coordinate geometry tas5s.

Setup Sets up surveying= #PS: survey or *ptical . Survey !onducts a survey= #PS: survey or *ptical survey. Apps 2ses applications that are pre'installed on the same device as the "A#N$T %ield."o+e s'&een "ap Shows the current @ob data on the map. Two Peg Test Performs the Two Peg Test for a 9evel survey. and with "A#N$T $nterprise.Total Station< survey. P/N 7010-0492 1-3 . and sets connections with the instrument. a networ5. 2navailable for 9evel configuration style. Not available for a #PS static and 9evel surveys. Sta5e Sta5es different ob@ects. 9evel Run Sets up a 9evel survey in running mode. !onnect Switches between #PS and optical instruments.

Indicates the connection status with the device. the indicator is grey. Help Opti n' !lic5 the icon to open a menu of options which may be useful for you. it turns yellow. Iou can connect>reconnect with the device in the !onnections dialog. then green. !loses the program. Iou can connect>reconnect in the !onnections dialog. If the device is disconnected. Indicates the power status of the controller battery. Returns to the home screen.(nt&o *'tion The top banner of the home screen shows the name of the @ob that is open and associate icons= *ptions Provides access to )elp files and options that are specific to the current open screen. $very screen and dialog in "A#N$T %ield has such an icon in 1-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Indicates the connection status with the enterprise= a green chec5 mar5 means there is an established connection and a red cross means that the connection is off. Bhen connecting. and finally turns into the image of the connected device with a green chec5 mar5 near it.

opened by clic5ing the icon. Port .."el# O#tions the top left corner.ata 9ogging !lic5 to view incoming and outgoing traffic information of a controller port connected to "A#N$T %ield.. !hats !lic5 !hats 'Q !reate New to configure a chat with the "A#N$T $nterprise users. P/N 7010-0492 1-0 . %ind out more.. %ind out more. Activate "odules !lic5 to view or change the license activation of the modules in "A#N$T %ield.. 6eyboard !hec5 mar5 to enable type entries in a dialogDP-7Ms fields using the soft 5eyboard. %ind out more. the menu. always contains the )elp option and may contain some additional options specific to the current screen. The help options for the home screen and for every folder are as follows= )elp Access help files... About !lic5 to view basic information about "A#N$T %ield software.

(nt&o *'tion Notes2 1-1 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

. Clic9 an ic n t /ana$e . P/N 7010-0492 2-1 . !r < &': New .ob Info Shows information about a current @ob. % & f lder 2pon installation. 3obs !lic5 the Jo! icon on the )ome screen to manage @obs. .ob . *pen . "A#N$T %ield only contains and opens the default @ob.C-a#te& 2 Mana.eletes a selected @ob from data storage.elete .ob !reates a new @ob.ob "a5es a selected @ob current.obs include all data collected in surveys of different configurations.in. .

In Name.in. *ptionally. and the )ome menu displays with the @ob name in the title area.ob file in a folder different from that indicates. /. !lic5 0rowse if reOuired to save the New . Current date displays the date and time when the @ob is being created. -. in Created by. 3obs Ne= % & The new @ob creation process is performed with the help of a Bi?ard. . NOTICE NOTICE The %o& name len$th should not e'ceed () characters and contain any of the follo#in$ sym&ols* R. The new @ob becomes the current @ob.Mana. (. in Comments. +. 1. The last specified file path is retained. To create a new @ob= &. 3. !lic5 at this step if you want the new @ob to use the settings from the last opened @ob as the default settings.STUVPWTXDYFZ>[\M]^_`.<aQb:c. indicates the directory in which this @ob will be created. enter a name for the @ob. *ptionally. enter a description for the @ob. !lic5 "e t to follow the wi?ard to complete the reOuired steps. enter any identifier of the person creating the @ob.

and clic5 "e t. A !onfiguration can be used by different . &(... Specify the Units for the @ob. Bhen opening the @ob the !onnections screen displays by default. A Survey !onfiguration is a set of parameters that does not depend upon the @ob. and then clic5 "e t. "ore. Select the Survey Style or create a new configuration..NOTICE NOTICE Clic+in$ durin$ any of the follo#in$ step creates the ne# . .m#$ files and have the symbol To open an e isting @ob= . 4. The title of the )ome menu will be the current @ob name. 7. and then clic5 "e t. &&.. All e isting @obs that are created>opened with "A#N$T %ield are defined as . Set Alarms for various situations. and then clic5 "e t. a?imuths and positions on roads. "ore.. !onfigure the Coordinate System settings reOuired for the @ob.o& #ith the settin$s that #ere confi$ured in all the previous steps -includin$ the opened one. "ore.. "A#N$T %ield always opens the last used @ob after the product activation and !onnections are performed. !onfigure the Display parameters for coordinates. &8. &-. !lic5 to open the )ome menu for the newly created @ob....obs.. "ore. "ore. Open % & 2pon starting..

%rom the ob Name list. )ighlight the name of the @ob to be opened. -. select "A#N$T %ield . select TopS2RC . (. )ighlight the name of the @ob to be opened. In the %ile Types drop'down list.ob 0ac5ups .ts@. and clic5 .ob %iles . -. 0y default the @ob files are stored in the ]program^Z. In the %ile Types drop'down list.U. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob in another folder if reOuired.U. To delete a @ob= &. -. will show the directory in which this @ob resides. highlight the name of the @ob you want to delete.m@f.obs folder. &. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob.&. highlight the name of the @ob you want to open.U. (. %rom the ob Name list. and clic5 To open a @ob that was created in TopS2RC= .ts@< or TopS2RC .ob 0ac5ups . 2elete % & Current ob" shows the name of the current @ob. The )ome screen displays. To open @ob bac5ups of e isting @obs= &. (. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob. .ba5<. The Created and Modi!ied fields will display when the @ob was created and last modified.ba5<. !lic5 to open the @ob.

. .ob folder. !lic5 to delete the @ob. and return to the . NOTICE NOTICE /hen deletin$ a . (.o&. -. 0y default the @ob files are stored in the ]program^Z. etc.. MA NET !ield automatically deletes all associated files -the . % & Inf .for nearest e pired option<.obs folder. will show the directory in which this @ob resides. +.o& history file.isplays information about= d The current @ob in general d The settings in the @ob d The currently connected receiver= e Receiver firmware version e Receiver *A% e piration date . !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired @ob in another folder if reOuired.The Created and Modi!ied fields will display when the @ob was created and last modified. A confirmation message displays. !lic5 on this date to e pand a full list of *A% options. !lic5 Ies to confirm deletion or No to cancel. ima$es.

2se an icon to= move up a folder create a new folder switch the display mode for the list of files to the detailed view switch the display mode for the list of files to the icon view (. %rom the Type drop'down list. select the type of files to display in the list for the current folder. displays the path to the current folder where you will search for a desired file= &. In Name. . enter the name of the file to select or select the desired file from the list. -.6r ='e The title of this dialog depends on the path from which it is called.

C-a#te& 3 Confi. and connects with the instrument at the startup prompt. !oordinate System Sets a coordinate system for the @ob. . #lobal 9ogs the current @ob history to the file. Allows #rid to #round transformation .. P/N 7010-0492 3-1 .*&in. C nfi$!re f lder Clic9 an ic n t c nfi$!re the 'ettin$': Survey !reates or edits a survey configuration.<.find out more.isplay !ustomi?es the interface to display data in the @ob.. 2nits Sets default units to be used in the @ob. 3obs !lic5 the Con$igure icon on the )ome screen to configure settings for the current @ob. 0ac5up !hanges the directory to save @ob bac5ups.

Bhen you have created the new configuration. If reOuired to change the settings for the current @ob. Select S!r8e. If the defaults do not suit your needs. C nfi$!rin$ a Ne= % & Bhen creating a new @ob. "enus Shows > hides functions in the menus. "A#N$T %ield contains some default configurations for different types of surveys with #NSS receivers and optical instruments. measure and store points.*&in.Confi. To do this. a wi?ard guides you through all of the steps needed to setup the new @ob configuration. !odes Sets code global parameters. C nfi$!rati n Survey !onfiguration is a set of parameters that control a survey. clic5 . define communication between devices. use the options of the !onfigure folder. the name of this configuration will appear in the list. you can create a new configuration for your survey. 3-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . $nterprise !onfigures the user account to enter into the "A#N$T $nterprise. 3obs Alarms Sets alarm parameters. Sta5e Reports !onfigures reports for sta5ing.

select the reOuired configuration. on optical configurations. d !lic5 the Edit button to change the highlighted configuration to suit your survey preferences. d !lic5 the Delete button to remove the configuration from the list. They #ill &e used #ith the device selected upon Connections* Optical or PS1.o&...Confi. NOTICE NOTICE 0oth types of confi$urations can &e selected for one . d After selecting the survey configurations for your @ob. select the configuration for the Total Station or 9evel mode.. which will be used each time you start a survey. C nfi$!rati n' The !onfigurations dialog presents a list of available survey configurations= names and types. a Ne4 3ob To set a survey configuration for the @ob= d %rom the G#S$ Con!i% drop'down list of available configurations. clic5 to store settings. P/N 7010-0492 3-3 . "agnet %ield contains a list of pre'defined configurations that you can use or modify. d !lic5 the Add button to create a new configuration.*&in. d %rom the &ptical Con!i% drop'down list of available configurations. on #PS: configurations and more. Survey configurations are stored in the Styles'tsstyles file in the "A#N$T %ield directory. and to return to the )ome screen. !reating > editing a survey configuration is accomplished with the help of a Bi?ard. %ind out more. Iou can customi?e the list of the configurations to include only ones you need= d )ighlight the name of the configuration..

"A#N$T %ield has a lot of geoid files. That can be "etersM I%eet ' . 2S %eet and Inches . (.C &.ob= Select the #ro(ection to be used in the @ob. "A#N$T %ield has a lot of cataloged datums.& 2S survey ft c &(88> -7-3 m<M I%eet and Inches. I!hains .'te/ To set the coordinate system for the . %ind out more..& International ft c 8.istance .& 2S survey ch c 11 2S survey ft<. 0nit' Iou can set different units and precisions for how "A#N$T %ield will display various numerical values in dialogs= d . +. which are selected during the "A#N$T %ield instalation.the latter two are calculated by ta5ing into account that & ft c &( in<. -.including area and volume< d Angle d !oordinate precision d Temperature and pressure *n the Distance tab.& International ch c 11 International ft< or 2S!hains . which are selected on "A#N$T %ield instalation. Specify the Datum as reOuired. rdinate S.. select as reOuired= d Distance unit for any length values. "A#N$T %ield has many pre'defined pro@ections and tabular pro@ections.-8+4 m<M 2S %eet . . Select the Geoid to bring to elevations if necessary. Use Grid)Ground to covert to ground coordinates if reOuired.

3f3. select 37. enter 3M3. If the selected units are in I!eet.49):83. 3. then a linear value in 2S!eet or International feet can &e entered &y appendin$ 3f3 or 3if3 to the end of the entered value. select as reOuired= d An%le unit for angular values. represented as ddd mm ss . or 3if3 are case insensitive. NOTICE NOTICE A. Certain an$les can &e entered as three points . linear values can &e entered as meters or I!eet &y appendin$ 3m3 or 3if3 to the entered value. #here f is feet. NOTICE NOTICE To display only inte$ers.the full circle contains -18 degrees< or Grads +Gons.3 or 3=3. linear values can &e entered as meters or 2Sfeet &y appendin$ 3m3 or 3f3 to the entered value. If the selected units are in meters. The appended characters 3m3. 3!3. NOTICE NOTICE /hen usin$ I!eet and Inches or 2S !eet and Inches the follo#in$ format is o&served* f. d Area unit for area values d *olume unit for volume values *n the An%le tab. That can be DMS. select 373 and so on. ' the full circle contains +88 grads . In other #ords. To display 8 decimal places.imuth can &e entered as t#o points separated &y 3<3.NOTICE NOTICE If the selected units are 2Sfeet. or 3I!3.gons<. d Distance precision for the number of decimal places in length values.ii'. ii is inches and ' is 456th of an inch.

"ore. that also can be -adians . In addition to An%le unit settings..the full circle contains (UPI radians<M or Mils . *n the &t.%<. That can be mm)g. *n the Coordinate tab.imuth from Point 477 to Point 474. d #ressure unit only for the raw measurements.separated &y 3<3.3 or 3=3.. d An%le precision for the number of decimal places in angular values.. in)g or mbar. select as reOuired= d Nort. "ore. 3. d 0ei%. 2i'pla. Iou can configure the display of the following settings= d Coordinate Type to view coordinates for the coordinate system selected d Coordinate &rder to display= Northing>$asting>)eight or $asting>Northing>)eight.....!< or %ahrenheit . That can be !elsius .er tab.in%)Eastin% precision for the number of decimal places in Northing>$asting coordinates. hPa. "ore.t precision for the number of decimal places in ellipsoidal heights and elevations. "ore. select if necessary= d Temperature unit only for the raw measurements.& "il c & "illiradian c &>&888 of a Radian< d C&G& an%le precision for the number of decimal places in angular values in !*#* tas5s. d /at)/on precision for the number of decimal places in latitude> longitude seconds.. !or instance a value of 477<474 indicates the A. d C&G& an%le unit for angular values in !*#* tas5s. A>I>E or I>A>E .

distance along the centerline< for stationing the centerline d Full Station to set one full station that was always &88 units traditionally %or e ample. d *n the *ptical tab. poor radio lin5 and loss of initiali?ation in the #NSS receiver.even full stations< and to the right of the plus are tens and units of meters to the nearest 8. d *n the !ontroller tab.d A1imut. The alert will sound automatically when an alert situation occurs.(/1 m .chainage< from station 8 : 88 is designated : +&.a remainder of a station<. a position at the distance of -+&. place chec5 mar5s in the #ower Alarm and Memory Alarm bo es to select the alert conditions of low power and memory in the controller.(/1. . or Best d Disp Dir As to view directions as bearings or a?imuths d Disp C/ #os As to display stations or chainages . $ast.88& m . chec5 Audible Alarm to enable audible alarms. Alar/' Iou can configure alert conditions= d *n the "ain tab. &ri%in to display the a?imuth computed from either reference directions= North. place chec5 mar5s in the #ower Alarm and Memory Alarm2 -adio /in3 and Fi45Float bo es to select the alert conditions of low power and memory. The numbers to the left of the plus are hundreds of meters . South. when using &88 m as a full station. place chec5 mar5s in the #ower Alarm and Trac3 bo es to select the alert conditions of low power and loss of the target in automatic trac5ing mode for optical instruments. d *n the #PS: tab.

select the type of correction data that will be used for survey if the Networ5 RT6. /.#PS d #eneric N"$A d PP Static d PP 6inematic d PP . !lic5 "e t.GPS S!r8e.#PS d Real Time .#PS -. select the Simulation mode chec5 bo .#PS. . Select the survey Type that depends on the eOuipment you will use and the results you need to obtain. $nter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the !onfigurations list. %rom the Corrections drop'down list. If reOuired to log rover data for post'processing in a real'time survey. designate the Manu!acturer of the rover receiver. +. "A#N$T %ield supports Topcon and So55ia. select and enable the #ost #rocessin% bo . or Networ5 .#PS survey type is chosen. 1ecei8er Ma9e Set general conditions for the survey and clic5 "e t= d To access #PS real'time surveys and sta5e routines without using real hardware. "A#N$T %ield provides configurations for the following #PS: survey types= d RT 6 d Networ5 RT6 d Networ5 . C nfi$!rati n' To create a new configuration= &. RT . The wi?ard will set default parameters specific for the eOuipment selected. d In the -over field. (.

if reOuired.a 0ase< is located at a fi ed point with 5nown coordinates. select the model of the receiver you are using as the base. will not be accessible. specify the necessary communication parameters first. Confi. designate the Manu!acturer of the base receiver. %rom the -eceiver Model list. the two receivers will differ from each other. %rom a functional point of view. li5e automatic S0AS satellites trac5ing. The base receiver will transmit the data via a radio lin5 to the other receiver .ata from satellites below this elevation will not be used.a Rover< to compute differential corrections. To configure an RT6 survey= d !onfigure the base receiver d !onfigure the base radio d !onfigure the rover receiver d !onfigure the rover radio 6a'e 1ecei8er To configure the base receiver= &. 1T3 S!r8e. -. The connection for e ternal receivers can be Bluetoot. d Select the #ost #rocessin% chec5 bo to store raw observations and process them later. and Serial.GP) )*&$e. (.degrees is appropriate.*&ations d In the Base field. Note= Topcon Generic selection will wor5 with all receiver models including #R'. Real'Time 6inematic survey implies use of a pair of receivers operating simultaneously and a radio lin5 established between the two receivers. 2sually the default &. Set Elevation Mas3. . . *ne of the receivers .but some functionality. The E4t' -eceiver bo is always chec5ed and is enabled for devices that have internal receivers. To establish a proper connection between the two receivers.

Confi. 31010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . The height type can be either *ertical when the height is measured to an ARP . select the -eceiver Settin%s option from the pop'up menu that displays by clic5ing in the top left corner. %rom the Antenna drop'down list. 3obs +. clic5 Use relative calibrations in the pop' up menu .. select the type of the antenna used at the base. All antenna calibrations are referenced to the ARP. 6a'e Peripheral' Select the Multiple #orts chec5 bo . 3. !lic5 "e t. *ptionally. "ore. To do this.erals to enable the "ultiple Ports option if needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to peripherals. %rom -T6 Format. 7. 1. *ptionally.t and height type. &8. !lic5 #erip.the chec5 will appear near the option name<. Iou can find details on antenna calibrations at the N#S site here. usually the middle bottom of the antenna< or Slant when the height is measured to the antenna edge. 4.*&in. Set the Antenna 0ei%. you can turn off the charger mode for the receiverDP-7Ms internal battery if it is available. The default is the use of absolute calibrations.the antenna reference point. you can set relative calibrations for the base antenna' To do this. select the format for the differential corrections data transmitted by the base radio. and then select the number of ports to use for base output if reOuired.. Additional dialogs will appear later in the wi?ard seOuence to setup parameters for each port. /.

select either e isting networ5 connection or dialup.. To do this.. select the Modem -e%ister option from the pop'up menu that displays by clic5ing in the top left corner to register the radio modem. select the Con!i% -E5S7 -epeater option from the pop'up menu that displays by clic5 corner. it supplies power to the receiver battery. Select the -adio Modem type from the list of pre'defined modem types. The base radio is intended for transmitting differential correcions and the rover radio is used for receiving them. Note= %or a Networ5 survey.. "ore. 1adi Radio modems are used in #PS real'time surveys. Also. Select the Turn C.. -. *ptionally. If you use a Air9in5 !. (. To configure the radio= &. To do this= &. Iou can an e ternal power supply without charging the receiver battery. P/N 7010-0492 in the top left 31111 .*&ations 1ecei8er Settin$' Bhen an e ternal power supply is used at the base. The list contents depends upon the survey configuration and the receiver model selected. and the receiver charger mode is turned on. !lic5 to save the setting. you can configure R$'S& Repeater for the rover radio. in the Networ3 Type field. there can be some radios that may be configured for output N"$A messages if reOuired. (.ar%er Mode &!! chec5 bo .GP) )*&$e. Confi. "ore."A or #PRS radio modem.

"A. !. /. $nter -e%ister 8n!ormation= Net 8D.*&in. !.Confi. Select #rovider' (. !.P< . #eneric."A(888. 3obs +. 1adi Para/eter' Specify parameters for the radio selected= d Air9in5 #PRS. !lic5 "e t to specify the Radio Parameters.&. modem types do not reOuire setting any parameters for the base radio. clic5 De!aults to return all the communication parameters to the default settings. %or more information see= Air9in5 !.igital 2)% %)7&/Plus Internal Satel Internal )iPer 9ite Radio Pacific !rest 2)% Satel 31212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . d *ther modems reOuire additional parameters to be set. If reOuired. To register the modem= &."2. M de/ 1e$i'ter Air9in5 #PRS and Air9in5 !.one Number' -. which are specific to the connected modem. 1. !lic5 the De!aults button to set the default data. Specify communication parameters for the receiver #ort that the radio is connected to= #arity2 the number of Data bits2 Baud rate2 the number of Stop bits."A reOuire registration. !lic5 the -e%ister button to pass registration. #assword and #. +.P. Sierra Bireless "P(88 !."A.P.

Select an appropriate operation #rotocol for data transmitting> receiving= d Simple4 is the default. (.GP) )*&$e.*&ations !ellular "odem Internal !. In the Address to Add field.9 radios and )iper ATs set in P.. The 8# Addresses list displays all IP addresses available. P/N 7010-0492 31313 . d #D/ wor5s with e isting P."A Rover Air9in5 !.P protocol= &. enter the IP address as reOuired.9 mode.P. It only wor5s with other ArBest . !lic5 Add to add the IP address to the list."A Rover Air9in5 !. enter the Base #8N.igital 2)% radio= &. Rover Air9in5 #PRS Rover Internal !. d Trimble wor5s with Trimble Trim Tal5 and Trim "ar5 Radios. %or the base radio. (. (.one Number that can be added to a #.one number list' 2i$ital 0HF To set parameters for the . Cell Ph ne To set phone information= &. This is ArBestJs proprietary protocol. Confi. %or the rover radio. enter the -over #8N and the Base #. Select the -evision type of digital 2)% radio used= either Di%ital U0F or Di%ital U0F 88. -.igital 2)%< radios."A 6a'e M!ltica't To set IP addresses for communication between the base and several rovers using 2. !lic5 Delete to delete any address from the list.

annel number.0PS6>. FH. This feature allows up to ten simultaneously transmitting radio modems.isable Scramblin%= either Set up .Confi. +. at the @ob site .the default<. Select Satel FCS &n . -.NPS6 if using the Simple protocol or #"S6 if using Trimble or P. 3obs -. (.Pac!rest< operation protocol. it provides more robust data communication over high interference areas. In %ree !hannel Scan mode.*&in. /. This feature allows up to five simultaneously transmitting radio modems. (. Pacific Cre't 1adi Par/' To set parameters for the Pacific !rest radio= 31414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Bhen set up. Select either . Set the operation #rotocol. at the @ob site .default<. or Satel FCS &!!.onJt set up.o not set . Select the type of Modulation for the radio modem. the radio modem will regularly scan the current operating freOuency and under certain conditions it can switch to the ne t freOuency. without interference.9. Set the C. *r select #D/ .the default< or . This is a hardware set.& is the default<. Internal HiPer 4ite Set the C. Select %)7&/ $ t if all receivers on the @obsite are eOuipped with %)7&/Plus radios. $nable>. without interference. Select the channel Spacin% step= either &(. Int Satel Par/' To set parameters for the internal Satel radio= &.annel number./ or (/ 5)? or . Select the /ocation to ad@ust the freOuency range and R% power level depending on the country.& is the default<.1* Pl!' To set parameters for the %)7&/ Plus radio= &.

P/N 7010-0492 31010 . Set the C. (. Press %&& to add the address to the 8# Addresses list. -. Select the C. (. 1 8er C2MA Par/' Set IP address for communication between the rover and the base. $nter the !. &. Satel 1adi Par/' To set parameters for the Satel radio= &. Press %&& to add the address to the 8# Addresses list. +. Set the Sensitivity of the radio to /ow. set #CC Mode . 1 8er C2P2 Par/' To set the IP address for communication between the rover and the base. (. address of the base radio in the Base CD#D Address field. In FEC2 select if you want to use %orward $rror !orrection techniOue to ma imi?e data communication. Fre9uency displays the corresponding value for the channel number selected. &. If reOuired. Select the output #ower value for the base radio."A address of the base radio in the Base CDMA Address field.*&ations &.annel number. -. Select the compatibility #rotocol. Confi.P. Select the C.Pacific !rest !orporation<.2 or turn it &!!' 0HF M de/ To set parameters for the internal 2)% radio= &. $nter the !.annel number.annel number from 8 to &/. (. Select the Model of the Satel modem. (.GP) )*&$e. Medium or 0i%.

(. set the #rotocol for data transmission= NT-8#. Note= Topcon Generic selection will wor5 with all receiver models including #R'. The E4t' -eceiver bo is always chec5ed and unavailable for every receiver model in the Receiver "odel list e cept #RS' &.Confi.the antenna reference point. In Networ5 survey. 1 8er 1ecei8er To configure the rover receiver= &.degrees is appropriate for the base and rover. select the correct antenna type used on the rover side. 4. The height type can be set to either *ertical when the height is measured to an ARP . select the model of the receiver you are using as the rover.. "A#N$T %ield directly installed on the #RS'& can use #RS'&Js internal #PS receiver. &.*&in. !lic5 #erip. $nter the #PRS address of the base in the Base G#-S Address field. 3. 1. 3obs 1 8er GP1S Par/' To set the IP address for communication between the rover and the base.t field. +. select the format for the differential corrections data transmitted by the rover radio. (. li5e automatic S0AS satellites trac5ing. %rom the Antenna drop'down list. %rom -T6 Format. Satellites below this elevation will not be considered. %rom the -eceiver Model list. Press %&& to add the address to the 8# addresses list. 31111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . will not be accessible. direct TC#)8#2 or CSD technology. "ore.but some functionality. To set the default antenna height. /. enter a value in the Antenna 0ei%. Set an Elevation Mas3. -. usually the middle bottom of the antenna< or Slant when the height is measured to the antenna edge. Typically the default &.erals to enable options to configure selected peripherals in the dialogs later..

clic5 Use !i4ed GGA position in the pop'up menu to enable and Set !i4ed GGA position. the R$'S& modem can be used as a stand'alone repeater to increase the range between the 0ase and Rover in spread spectrum systems. 1E"S1 FH. P 'iti n f r GGA If reOuired. you can instruct the rover to use relative calibrations on the base' To do this. P/N 7010-0492 31717 .GP) )*&$e.. In Networ5 RT6 survey you can set a fi ed position for ##A message from the rover receiver' To do this.1* 1epeater If reOuired.. The point position values appear in the coordinate fields. "ore. *ptionally. $nter the coordinate values in the edit fields. (. &8. All antenna calibrations are referenced to the ARP. select the -eceiver Settin%s option from the pop'up menu that displays by clic5ing top left corner. clic5 -elative calibrations in the on base in the pop'up menu . The point position values appear in the coordinate fields. !lic5 the /ist selection button and select the point in the list.*&ations 7. "ore. The default is the use of absolute calibrations. -. !lic5 the Map selection button and select the point on the map. set a fi ed position for ##A message from the rover receiver. Iou can find details on Antenna !alibrations at the N#S site here. &&. Confi... *ptionally.the chec5 will appear near the option name<. you can turn off the charger mode for the receiverJs internal battery. Iou can do this in one of the following ways= &. To do this.

(. select the type of connection of the repeater= either to the -eceiver or to the Controller to setup the modem. 31515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Additional dialogs will appear later in the wi?ard seOuence to setup parameters for each port and specify N"$A messages for output. d Set the C.annel number. select any options to wor5 with peripherals= &. without interference. at the @ob site . Additional dialogs will appear later in the wi?ard seOuence to setup parameters for each port. "ore.Confi. 1 8er 1ecei8er Peripheral' If reOuired. Select the Multiple #orts chec5 bo to configure multibase input for the rover. Select the number of ports from the drop' down list that appears and clic5 . Select the number of ports from the drop' down list that appears and clic5 .. Select the NMEA #orts chec5 bo to configure the output of the N"$A messages..*&in.& is the default<. d Set the operation #rotocol. +. -. Press De!aults to set the port properties to the default values. In Connect #ort Setup set the properties of the connection port. %rom Connect Type. This feature allows up to ten simultaneously transmitting radio modems. Press Ne t and configure the modem parameters= d Select the /ocation to ad@ust the freOuency range and R% power level depending on the country. (. 3obs To configure the R$'S& Repeater= &. Select the Enable -E5S7 -epeater con!i%uration chec5 bo to enable further configuration of the R$'S& as a repeater. Note= 2se only one radio to receive corrections from the base.

and . month. "ore. Select the E4ternal /aser chec5 bo to configure the laser device that can be connected either directly to the Controller or through the -eceiver. day. year. position.GP) )*&$e. d *TG to output the traveling direction and velocity. This enables support of #oggle "aps that cannot recogni?e default F#NF or F#9F as Tal5er I. !lic5 #arameters to specify them. the satellite used for positioning. and positioning. d GGA to output data on time. Confi.. P/N 7010-0492 31919 . O!tp!t NMEA To configure the NMEA Messa%es for output= &. and local time ?one.. in appropriate N"$A sentences generated. "ore. d GNS to output data on time.s in these messages. This is used to support RAI". position. Select the Set G# as -eceiver Tal3er 8D chec5 bo to instruct the receiver to use F#PF as Tal5er I. Select the mmG#S$ chec5 bo to configure the mm#PS: system.*P. and positioning of #PS:#9*NASS . d :DA to output the 2T!..*&ations -. 4i't f NMEA /e''a$e' The following NMEA Messa%es are available for output= d GSA to output the operation mode of the #NSS receiver. -... d G-S to output the residual error of distance for each satellite. (..#NSS<. d GST to output the statistics of position errors. $nter the 8nterval in seconds at which you want the messages to be output . d G// to output data on the current latitude>longitude and positioning mode.up to 8. Select the chec5 bo es near the types of messages as reOuired. !lic5 #arameters to specify them. "ore.& sec<.

course and speed data provided by a #NSS navigation receiver. d GM# to output #NSS map pro@ection fi data. NOTICE NOTICE /hen measurin$ the hei$ht of the >over antenna. d -MC to output time. d #. Select the -eceiver port2 which is connected to the mm#PS: Sensor. 4a'er C nfi$!rati n To configure the E4ternal /aser instrument connected to the -eceiver or to the Controller= 32020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . $nter the 0ei%. elevation angle. satellite number. Select Auto to automatically control the mm#PS receiverJs detection level of the transmitterJs signal. the mm#PS: icon will change to warn the user. a wireless sensor connected to the Rover pic5s up the signals from the laser transmitter for accurate . and SNR. //GPS> In mm#PS aided RT6 survey. d 0DT to output the direction . 3obs d GS* to output the number of satellites. Select the Sensor Gain to ad@ust the gain on the mm#PS: Sensor. To configure the mm#PS:= &.*&in.millimeter< elevations. d -&T to output rate of turn. a?imuthal angle.ATT to output attitude parameters. If the #PS: height and mm#PS: height differ by more than the amount entered.Confi. date. include the hei$ht of the sensor #ith a 856 inch plu$. -.t Di!!erence /imit value to set the threshold for the difference between #PS and mm#PS: height measurements. (. position.heading<.

baud and stop rates to connect to the 9aser Instrument. d Float= indicates that the positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and rover receivers. To set the parameters that will be used during a survey= &. Set /aser #ort Settin% including port. Inc.&.9 and 9aser Technology. Select the laser Manu!acturer. were N*T fi ed . including autonomous solutions. There can be a combination of the following solution types= d Fi4ed mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %i ed *nly solution with mm#PS: calculated height. S!r8e. d DG#S= indicates that the positions were achieved using the pseudo'range measurements from base and rover receivers. Bhat is displayed in the list for selection depends on the type of selected survey. !urrently we support ". however. d Fi4ed &nly= indicates that positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from 0ase and Rover receivers. select the solution type for each position computation in a real'time survey as reOuired. +.their float estimates were used instead<. .ata will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this selection. Select the Type of laser measurement system if it uses $ncoding or not. %rom the Solution Type drop'down list. Integer ambiguities. . Para/eter' The survey parameters are associated with the type of the survey. (. -. Select the Model of the 9aser Instrument. Integer ambiguities were fi ed. parity. data. d All= indicates that the positions were computed using all the epochs accepted. d Float mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %loat solution with mm#PS: calculated height.

d Select the #recision chec5 bo and. in the edit fields enter the hori?ontal and vertical acuuracy in meters reOuired before a point can be saved. d In the 8nterval edit field enter the value of this interval.od drop'down list. both these conditions must be satisfied before the point is saved. Sta9e !t Para/eter' To set the parameters that will be used during a #PS sta5eout= &. select the reference direction that will be used in point sta5eout. set the following parameters for auto storing positions in the dynamic survey= d %rom the Met. (.d Auto= indicates autotonomous positions when differential corrections are not available. NOTICE NOTICE Every survey parameter can &e chan$ed #ith the help of the Settin$s &utton from any Survey screen in PS1 mode.8&/ m and 8. The default is -. by hori?ontal distance. respectively. set the following parameters for auto' storing positions in a stationary survey= d Select the Num Meas to Av% chec5 bo and. (. The defaults are 8. enter the hori?ontal distance tolerance value. or by slope distance. d Note= If both the chec5 bo es are chec5ed. select the method for setting the interval between the received epochs= by time. This is used to determine when you are close enough to the point for the bullseye to show up. if it is to be used in the logging. In the Auto Topo field. In the 01 Dist Tolerance edit field. %rom the -e!erence Direction drop'down list. It can be . if they are ta5en into account. in the edit field enter the number of measurements reOuired before a point can be saved. In the Auto Accept field.8-8 m. -.

or the direction to the reference point . d Float= indicates that the positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and rover receivers. If you want to enter your own number. d Fi4ed &nly= indicates that positions were computed by RT6 engine using the carrier phase measurements from 0ase and Rover receivers.8&/ m and 8. +.their float estimates were used instead<. d Select the #recision bo if reOuired to ta5e into account the hori?ontal and vertical precision tolerances for #PS vector in meters that should be met before a point is saved. select the solution type to filter the type of solutions that will be used for the sta5eout. Integer ambiguities. moving direction. d Float mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %loat solution with mm#PS: calculated height. Integer ambiguities were fi ed. set the following parameters for the auto'storing of sta5ed points= d Select the Num Meas to Av% bo if reOuired to use the number of measurements to average before logging a point. d DG#S= indicates that the positions were achieved using the pseudo'range measurements from base and rover receivers. -. d Auto= indicates autotonomous positions when differential corrections are not available. The defaults are 8. including autonomous solutions. . The default is -. were N*T fi ed .a?imuth<. respectively. however. enter the value in the field. If you want to enter your own precision tolerances.North. In the Auto Accept field. %rom the Solution Type drop'down list. d All= indicates that the positions were computed using all the epochs accepted. enter the values in the fields. There can be a combination of the following solution types= d Fi4ed mmG#S$= indicates that the positions were %i ed *nly solution with mm#PS: calculated height.8-8 m.

design point with a prefi . "ore. ne t point. or design point with a suffi . this . where Gst5fH is the prefi <. Settin$ n te' f r the 'ta9ed p int' The Note can be set to either design point name. "ore. the sta5ed point would be named &&88 . "ore. if the constant specified is &888. !lic5 "e t to set the parameters for storing sta5ed points in the Store Sta3ed #oint As fields= d The #oint name can be set to the design point. 2efinin$ na/e' f r the 'ta9ed p int' The Point name can be set to either design point name. %or instance.. the corresponding sta5ed out point is named A9P)A&888.. for the design point A9P)A. ne t point name. design point with a pre'defined prefi . design point with a predefined suffi .that is. If the Station D *ffset option is activated. the constant is appended to the name. &oth these conditions must &e satisfied &efore the point is saved. The choice of the prefi or suffi appears only when the corresponding item is chosen from the drop'down menu. it can be Station D *ffset information. %or the 2nited States. /. Also. an edit bo for entering an alphanumeric prefi appears. If the design point is alphanumeric.. and the design point is &88.. Select the Display option from the pop'up menu that appears by clic5ing in the top left corner of the dialog if reOuired to specify an icon for the sta5ed point. %or e ample. a specified numerical constant can be added to automatically generate the sta5ed point name. design point with a prefi or design point with a suffi .. Also. &88:&888<. 1.that is. design point with a predefined prefi . or design point with a pre'defined suffi . st5f8&.NOTICE NOTICE If &oth the &o'es are chec+ed. d The Note can be set to the design point..

Sta9ed P int Ic n To define the icon for sta5ed points to display on the map= &. !lic5 on the bo of the desired color to highlight it. depending on the choice for the prefi . !ha/8/.prefi is GStaH. (.ed Epoc./:/. . button to set the color for the C l r Palette This palette allows you to select the color for the ob@ects to be displayed on the map.apanese mar5ets the prefi is GNoH. "ore. ./R/. Ad8anced Para/eter' This dialog allows you to change advanced signal processing parameters= d The Satellite System to use from the default G#S and G/&NASS to G#S only. d In the Color field press the icon in the dialog. Select the Use icon !or sta3ed point bo to enable settings. !lic5 the o5 button to return to the Sta5ed Point Icon dialog to view the colored icon. or No. for the international mar5ets the prefi is G!haH.8./R/. d %rom -T6 #osition..8 respectively. the method of RT6 corrections definition= E4trapolation or Matc. In the Sta3ed #oint field= d %rom the 8con drop'down list select the icon appearance that will be reflected it in the window. "A#N$T %ield automatically generates one note for each sta5eout point= Sta/:/./R/. respectively<.sometimes described as asynchronous or synchronous. (.. Bith this option activated. and for the 6orean>. To do this= &.8.

. e 0y default. d Select the Co5&p Trac3in% chec5 bo to involve additional resources for acOuisition of the signal. -eduction is selected to enable the use of a special signal processing techniOue for reduction of !>A code phase multipath. d Select the Trac3 /= Satellites chec5 bo to enable 9/ signal trac5ing. select the manufacture of the 0ase receiver to designate 0ase "a5e . d 0y default the Multipat. it is set to Automatic Detection to override 0ase "a5e automatically detected by the Rover receiver if this information is transmitted by the 0ase. phase' and delay'loc5 loops. d Select the Canopy Environment chec5 bo to allow the RT6 engine to use less rigid thresholds when filtering out measurement outliers. e Select &t. This mode is recommended when wor5ing under tree canopy or in other cases of high multipath.d Select the Trac3 /<C Satellites chec5 bo to enable 9(! signal trac5ing.I#S !lass< used by Rover receiver to account for #9*NASS biases. d %rom the Base Station Ma3e drop'down list. NOTICE NOTICE This option re"uires Topcon receiver f5# at rover ).: or hi$her.er for the base receiver of other class that is included in the I#S list. e Select Un3nown for the base receiverJs class that is not included in the I#S list. d Select the -T6 Settin%s option from the pop'up menu that appears by clic5ing in the top left corner of the dialog if reOuired to set more advanced parameters. "ore...

/T and 77. d Auto5disconnect !rom server= when selected . d #rompt !or antenna .t= when selected . 1T3 Settin$' This dialog allows you to set the following parameters to govern the RT6 engine= d Ambi%uity /evel= this three'state parameter is a simplified version of a float ambiguity fi indicator the RT6 engine uses when fi ing integer ambiguities.by default<. computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a #PS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database.7T thresholds. 77.by default<.by default<. d E4pected Correction= sets the differential correction update interval for the base station. /ow. the longer the integer ambiguity search time. d -esolution #eriod= defines the interval in seconds for 0ase Transmission > Rover Reception period at which the ambiguities estimation is performed. an automatic disconnection from the server is performed in a Networ5 survey.by default<. d C. selection correspond to the indicatorYs 7/T. The higher the confidence level specified. d Auto5connect to server= when selected . prompts for a height of the antenna before a point is stored. an automatic connection to the server is established in a Networ5 survey. Medium and 0i%.Mi'cellane !' ?GPS@ Para/eter' The "iscellaneous dialog is used to customi?e the user interface= d Display coordinates a!ter measurement= when selected .ec3 si%nal 9uality= select the bo to chec5 the signal Ouality for the radio lin5 in a Networ5 survey. respectively. effective only in the RT6 "atched . d Beep on storin% points= by default this is turned on to beep each time the point is stored.ei%.

and select the Networ3 -T6 type in the Survey dialog. (. TodayJs operating reference station networ5s are creating various sets of data. d Sin%le Base e to receive RT6 corrections from a single base. d E4ternal Con!i% e when the receiver uses an $ ternal program to configure RT6 corrections. *n the "odem !onnect dialog select the device the modem is connected to. Iou have to obtain the user name and password for NTRIP server. d NT-8# e select to receive RT6 corrections from the Internet through NTRIP !aster. Select the desired Corrections type= d *-S e to receive Cirtual Reference Station data. -. form of data transmission to receive RT6 corrections via a cellular phone. !onfigure the Rover Receiver. d CSD Data e select to use the !S. The value should be set to the e act rate during which the base station transmits differential correction data. As reOuired. Net= r9 1T3 Networ5 Real Time 6inematic is similar to RT 6 survey but implies that the Rover uses RT6 correction data received from operating reference station networ5s to compute its position. d F6# e to use networ5 area corrections. d MAC eto use "aster'Au iliary !oncept data. This parameter will instruct the rover receiver to output the RT6 position at the same rate at which differential corrections are updated. +. d TC#)8# e select to receive RT6 corrections from the Internet.$poch mode. Name the configuration. . To configure the Networ5 RT6 = &. select one of the following protocols from the #rotocol drop'down list.

(. enter the user name and password in the 9ogin Info dialog. %or server connection. $nter dialup information in the "odem . Select -eceiver if the modem is connected with the receiver.Net4o&6 7T8 /. -. %or internet connection. 4. If needed. $nter the User 8D for the server. 3. /. $nter the #8N number for the server. authori?ation.select the radio button as reOuired<. If reOuired. enter a Name for the address which displays in the address list' . +. M de/ 2ial!p Inf To set parameters for a dialup internet connection= &. (. Select the 2se #P2I. Select Controller if the modem is connected with the controller. clic5 the De!aults button. $nter the Dialup Number needed to ma5e the internet connection. 7. 1. To set the values to default. enter the settings in the "odem Internet Info dialog. $nter the #assword to login to the server with the entered user id. (.ialup Info dialog if reOuired. bo to turn on the method of #P2I. $nter an internet Address that will be used for the connection in the 8# or >eb format . M de/ C nnect To configure the modem connection= &. M de/ Internet Inf To enter information for internet connection= &. Select a virtual radio port for data input in the "odem Receiver Info dialog. configure the receiver port for connection and the Rover Radio parameters. %or radios connected to the Receiver.

#PS solutions are derived from Networ5 .ifferential #PS implies the usage of pseudorange corrections received from operating differential #PS reference station networ5s. 4 $in Inf $nter your User 8D and #assword to login to the server with these credentials. #R')iper )iper II #RS'& #RA& Net= r9 2GPS Networ5 .0T connection< 0 . 33030 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .Advanced Input "ode< is automatically selected from the following default values= Product Cirtual port . Iou can select an address by double'clic5ing on it in the list. .*&in. . Press %&& "e' to add the address to the Address list' New IP> Beb addresses>ports can be deleted or added to the list. M de/ 1ecei8er Inf The *irtual -adio #ort for AI" . +. The configuration of the Networ5 .see Survey Parameters<. A ! A Cirtual port .#PS survey type is similar to Networ5 RT6.!able connection< 0 0 . 3obs -. /.Confi. The difference is that "A! data is not used and . Press (p&ate to update the address in the address list.#PS survey .

1eal Ti/e 2GPS Real Time . -.!anadian nation'wide .#PS service<. Select the Corrections type to receive . A number of differential services e ist to transmit differential correctional data. select the manufacturer for the rover receiver= Topcon or So55ia.#PS survey is used in #IS applications.#PS correction data from one source of differencial corrections as reOuired and also enabled for the receiver. and S0AS . !onfigure the appropriate parameters for the differential source selected= d User Base configuration is similar to RT 6 d 0eacon d S0AS>Autonomous d CDG#S . +. #eneric N"$A will appear in the "anufacturer drop'down selection list.Satellite' 0ased Augmentation Systems< service. (. In Receiver "a5e. geostationary satellites .#PS= &. d *mniSTAR'C0S or *mniSTAR')P . including maritime radio beacons. specify communication parameters for the receiver #ort that the CDG#S radio is connected to= #arity2 the number of Data bits2 Baud rate2 the number of Stop bits. To configure Real Time . /.as with the *mniSTAR service<. Note= Bhen SBAS)Autonomous correction type is selected. Name the configuration and select the -eal Time DG#S>NMEA type in the Survey dialog. !onfigure the Rover Receiver. Real Time .ifferential #PS implies that the rover receiver uses differential pseudorange correction data transmitted from .#PS services.

Select the Automatic Scan Mode chec5 bo if you want to enable this mode in 0R'& to get the 0eacon signal automatically. . or "SAS< source of differential correction data. Select the Station that provides broadcasting differential corrections for the rover. Name and Type= These columns will list all possible S0AS PRN numbers with the respective names of the satellites and types of satellite systems. (. +. Select the bo es near the PRN numbers of the satellites as reOuired. 0R'& will search broadcasting freOuencies and output RT!" corrections from the best signal.#PS solution. The availability of satellite signals depends upon the receiver type and location. %or custom selection. custom setup is reOuired.and other new receivers that support automatic trac5ing. $#N*S. Not more than two S0AS satellites can be enabled for trac5ing in Topcon #eneric receiver. d PRN P. Select the Beacon Corrections !rom B-57 chec5 bo if reOuired to use the beacon receiver 0R'& as a source of differential corrections for the rover. Note= All satellites can be selected. S6AS Set!p This dialog contains settings for the Satellite'0ased Augmentation Systems . Note = If the Topcon #eneric receiver was selected in the Rover Receiver dialog. The satellite most available from those selected will be used in . (. To configure S0AS= &. %or #R'. Select the Country where the radio'beacon based differential service is located.BAAS.C nfi$: 6eac n To configure settings for a radio beacon source for differential #PS corrections= &. -. you can select one of two options for use of S0AS satellites= Best Available or Custom.

+. clic5 #PS number and select the appropriate number from the pop'up menu. To configure this survey type= &. Generic NMEA configuration only implies reception of . !onfigure the Rover Receiver. d None= ionospheric corrections are not used d Apply i! avail= use ionospheric corrections if available d Use sat only i! avail= use only the satellites for which ionospheric corrections are available. The Receiver "odel will be set to Generic NMEA and Antenna to Un3nown. .a wide'area.#PS survey on Topcon controllers with internal N"$A'standard #PS receivers . select Generic NMEA in the "anufacturer drop'down list. (. Generic NMEA "A#N$T %ield supports Real Time . -. *ne of currently unused #PS numbers should be selected in this column to be able to trac5 this satellite in Satellite Ciew dialog. select the name of the Satellite to be used. Name the configuration. It is recommended to use ionospheric corrections. !onfigure S0AS>Autonomous parameters. $nable>disable use of ionospheric corrections from the S0AS satellite when computing positions.e cept #RS&<. C nfi$: O/niSTA1 %or *mniSTAR'C0S and *mniSTAR')P . /. satellite delivered. The availability of satellite signals depends upon the receiver type and location.d #PS P= This PRN P applies only to the Topcon #eneric receiver. -. To change.#PS correction data from an S0AS system. and select the -eal Time DG#S>NMEA type in the Survey dialog. differential Cirtual 0ase Station and )igh Performance #PS services<. In Receiver "a5e. Select SBAS)Autonomous in the !orrections drop'down list.

-. To configure the PP Static survey for one static recever= &. Name the configuration. you can select Manual or Automatic to start logging. PP Set!p $nter information for the raw data logging. d /o% To" Iou can log only to the -eceiver. Note= In PP . and select the ## Static type in the Survey dialog. If the coordinates of one receiver are 5nown. the raw data logging to the Controller is allowed. d Start /o% = *nly for the rover PP setup in PP'enabled surveys. +. Select the receiver vendor in the Receiver "a5e dialog. $nter information for the raw data logging in the PP Setup dialog. d File name" Select if the name of the receiver file is to be set automatically or by you. /.ifferential processing ta5es place when data from two or more receivers are processed together in order to compute the receivers relative position. the software operator processes the data collected in the field and calculates the relative position of the receivers. . the corresponding dialog bo will display at the logging start.PP Static Post Processing Static survey is a post'processed survey using raw #PS data collected by two or more receivers at stationary occupations for a long period of time.#PS survey. %or the user'defined. . In the office. The default depends on the survey type. then the coordinates of the other can be calculated. (. d /o%%in% -ate" Select the logging interval in seconds during which data is logged to the file. !onfigure Static Receiver. !onfigure the *ccupation Times.

you can Select this bo to allow logging additional chec5out information about RT6 mode for software developers. the same as it is for the PP Static type.#PS has to be written to files for further processing. #enerally the default settings are appropriate.right now for !ontroller modem connection only<. Occ!pati n A InitialiBati n Ti/e' This dialog contains timing settings for receiver loggings. . Select the 8nitiali1ation time in minutes to define initiali?ation times. The processing of the collected data is performed later. *ne is fi ed. used in automatic mode during a PP Survey.d /o% corrections= *nly for the rover PP setup in PP'enabled standard and Networ5 RT6 survey .ifferential #PS implies that the raw observations made by the Rover and 0ase receivers in Real Time . the other is moving along some tra@ectory li5e in RT 6. Note= The occupation times vary based on the number of satellites and the number of receiver freOuencies. PP 3ine/atic Post Processing 6inematic implies two receivers. A minimum of four satellites is reOuired. PP 2GPS Post Processing .

. C nnecti n / de Initial Connection The connection mode. In'tr!/ent To set an instrument for the survey= &. (. To simulate a real survey. All the data is entered manually.Optical S!r8e. and also #owin for total stations. Select the total station or level Model. In this mode. $nter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in the !onfigurations list. C nfi$!rati n' To create a new configuration= &. it can be the following= Cable2 -adio2 Bluetoot. no measurements are performed. Select the survey Type that depends on the eOuipment you will use and the results you need to obtain. d -obotic ' survey can be performed by one person with a motori?ed instrument. (. Select the Manu!acturer of total stations or levels. "A#N$T %ield supports Topcon and So55ia.epending upon the type of the instrument. "A#N$T %ield provides configurations for the following *ptical survey types= d Conventional ' standard survey with a total station and reflectors. d -e!lectorless ' survey in which a reflector is not used. d /evel ' levelling with a digtal level. select "anual "ode.2 -C Unit2 etc' . NOTICE NOTICE The models sho#n in the list correspond to the chosen type of survey.

Possible seOuences are 0S>%S Plunge 0S>%SM 0S>%S Plunge %S>0SM %S>0S Plunge 0S>%SM %S>0S Plunge %S>0SM 0S Plunge 0S>%S Plunge %SM or %S Plunge %S>0S Plunge 0S. Tolerances The admissible deviation values of the hori?ontal and vertical angles and the distance. Confi. %ngle Se*uence Sets the seOuence of measured angles.baud rate<. ma5e sure the *utput "odule is set to RS(-(.O#ti'al )*&$e.irect>Reverse is selected in the "eas "ethod field. )easurement )etho& Sets the mode of side'shot measurements.irect>Reverse.irect or Sideshot .*&ations Ca&le Ca!le Comm Settings The parameters of the cable connection= 0aud .number of the data bits<.irect. 0S ' bac5sight point . Para/eter' The Survey Parms dialog contains the parameters that will be used by default during the survey.ir>Rev.the ne t occupation point<. If this . "um Sets The number of measurement sets participating in the average.ir>Rev in the "eas "ethod field allows for NumSets to be greater than &. Sideshot .ist Sets'.igital 9evel. )ere %S is foresight point . %uto %ccept )eas This is for use with the sideshot "eas "ethod FAngle'.irect>ReverseF for motori?ed surveys.ata . It can be= Sideshot'. These are used for the reduction of the angle errors. and Angle>. . A choice of Angle>.ist Sets'dir> RevF and FSideshot'.the previous occupation point<. S!r8e. Parity. %or a .number of the stop bits<. and Stop . and Plunge term stands for flipping and rotating the total station telescope by &48 degrees. )ere the Num Sets defaults to & and cannot be changed if Sideshot'.ist Sets'.

ist Sets'dir> RevF for Robotic and non'R!( surveys. 3obs option is chec5ed.) mo&e . you will be prompted to accept the measurement. If unchec5ed.if more than one set is chosen<. . "e t *pens the second Survey parameters dialog. If chec5ed. S!r8e. ' slope distanceM ). when a set is complete. then turn to the ne t point in the seOuence.istance %+eraging It determines if the distance used is measured using one signal or average of several signals. Prism Constant The parameter of the prism. E. Para/eter' )eas Type Sets the order and the type of the measurements in one set. These are used for the reduction of the distance measurement errors. . then turn to the ne t point in the seOuence. once the total station turns to the prism. the total station will automatically advance to the ne t set and continue the operation. characteri?ing the difference between the reflection plane and the center of the prism. when each set is complete . when the total station turns to the prism it will automatically ta5e a measurement. ' hori?ontal distanceM C.Confi.etermines the sensitivity to use for the distance measurements ' coarse or fine. the user will be prompted to advance to the ne t set. %uto %&+ance Set This is for use with the sideshot "eas "ethod FAngle'. ' vertical distance. )easure -e+erse .*&in. )ere= )A ' hori?ontal angleM CA ' vertical angleM S. If unchec5ed.istances $nables the reverse distance measurements.

irection.only for the Robotic survey< The parameters of the automatic survey. Confi. Sta9e !t Para/eter' The Sta5eout Parms dialog enables you to set the parameters that will be used during a sta5eout. or in the Automatic )A. .esign Point based on )A only or )A> CA. 0ori1 .isplay Coor&inates a$ter )easurements= when chec5ed.*&ations Point .O#ti'al )*&$e. Turn TS to .ist Toler Set the hori?ontal distance tolerance value.ui&e Select this chec5 bo to operate the trac5ing lights.irection The Total Station Sta5eout uses the location of the instrument as the Reference . -e$erence . Mi'cellane !' ?Optical@ Para/eter' The "iscellaneous dialog is used to customi?e the user interface= . computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a TS measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored into the database. "on/Prism Set whether to use the prism or non'prism mode %utoTopo . or Automatic )A>CA modes P int Pr pertie' Point Increment Select if the point number is to be incremented when adding a new point.esign Point Turns the Instrument to the .

)anual Sta3eout (p&ate 4-o!otic 5nly6= when chec5ed. 34040 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . N*T$= In conventional or reflectorless modes this option may be chec5ed for the $NT button on controllers to invo5e the "$AS2R$ processM otherwise. (se 0ori1ontal %ngle 9e$t= )ori?ontal Angles are measured anti' cloc5wise. 0ol& 5$$set )easurement= if chec5ed.ialog will be displayed automatically when you attempt to access any of the dialogs involving total station observations.Confi.igital 9evel.Certical . 3obs %pply Earth Cur+ature an& -e$raction= corrects the computed heights for $arth !urvature .*&in. This applies to the Sta5eout dialogs only. %utomatically &isplay 2S Setup &ialog: if chec5ed. If chec5ed. the "eas button in the Sta5eout dialogs must be pressed to ma5e a measurement to the Robotic Total Station. will bring up the 0ac5sight !hec5 dialog when the 0ac5sight Setup dialog is e ited. 2eep on storing points= beeps each time the point is stored. a dialog will appear to specify the code and attribute before a surveyed point is stored.istance< and slope distances and vertical angles for atmospheric refraction. 7% 8ero at 9e+el= CA is set to Eero at 9evel. Sta3eout soun&= gives a sound indicator in Sta5eout as the point is sta5ed out.Target< before a point is stored. 0ol& 7ertical 5$$set= available only for the . prompts for a height of the Rod . Prompt $or 2S Chec3= when chec5ed. Prompt $or -o& 0eight= when chec5ed. Bhen not chec5ed the measurements are recorded continuously. this is used to hold the Certical *ffset between measurements. Prompt $or Co&es= when chec5ed. the 0ac5sight Setup . the dialog to measure an offset point with the help of the selected offset tool displays automatically after each measurement. the $NT 5ey will "$AS2R$ the first time in sta5eout and then become a SAC$ button.

*&ations 2S Is %l'ays -e*uire&= if chec5ed.for AP'9&A and #RT'(888< or #attern 7 . medium or high. and returns to the point where the prism was lost. The auto trac5ing mode changes to manual mode when the prism cannot be found within si attempts.for AP'9&A and #RT'(888< or #attern < .O#ti'al )*&$e. In this case the search pattern tries to locate the prism in a very short time. Instrument searches from up to down. The searching continues until the prism is found. Sensiti+ity Sets the power of the accepted signal. SearchATrac9 ?T pc n@ The Search>Trac5 dialog contains the settings for the total station signal trac5ing in the Robotic mode. a warning to set 0ac5sight always displays when attempting to access any of the dialogs involving total station and level observations. in revolutions per minute. . The Normal . The Instrument searches in up and down directions gradually from the point where the prism is lost.for the rest of the instruments< mode also can be selected to search for the prism. Trac3 9ight P/N 7010-0492 34141 . Turning Spee& Sets the turn speed of a total station.for the rest of the instruments< mode can be selected to search the prism at the point where the prism is lost. or. The searching continues until the prism is found or a ma imum of si attempts. Confi. The 0i%. Pattern Sets the program for the trac5ing and searching. Tr3 Spee& Sets the speed for trac5ing. It can be slow. It can be low. Start Search %$ter Sets the delay between the loss of the signal and the start of searching. medium or fast. in the case of #TS488a model ' Survey or "achine controlled.

select whether to output %!'/. only ##A format is available. File "ame If 9og To %ile is chosen. in degrees. 34242 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . It can be narrow.*&in. SearchATrac9 ?S 99ia@ The Search>Trac5 dialog contains the settings for the total station signal trac5ing in the Robotic mode. for the vertical and hori?ontal planes. for the vertical and hori?ontal planes. 3obs Sets if the light on the line of sight should be switched on. or communication ports. M nit r Opti n' 9og To Select from options None. in degrees. If 9og To %ile or a communication port is chosen.Confi. enter the name and location of the file to log into. off. %or Coordinates. select from the following= 5utput Type Select whether to output -aw Data or Coordinates. -ange Sets the range of searching. middle or wide. or the automatic mode is enabled. %!'1>#TS'3 or #TS'1 format. Search %rea Sets the area of searching or trac5ing. Scan -ange Sets the width of the trac5ing signal. %ile. 5utput Format %or -aw Data. Available only in the AP'9&A total stations.

Select the datum from the drop'down list.. -. "ore.(3 datum. data and stop bits settings for the comm port.. Initially the list is empty.!oordinate !onversion Software<. +. NA?6)-IT>!@(. !lic5 to activate pro@ections necessary for wor5. More. In #ro(ection select the pro@ection to be used from the drop' down list.ste+ Comm Settings If a serial !*" port is selected. parity. !lic5 to add a custom datum if necessary. P/N 7010-0492 34343 . enter the baud rate.ations in MA NET !ield #ith respect to the / S6: datum* NA?6). to ma5e the coordinates in "A#N$T %ield eOual to the same from !orpscon . (.. NOTICE NOTICE The NA?6) datum has three independent reali. and NA?6)ANOAT>ANS. Select the Use Grid)Ground chec5 bo to enable transformation to ground coordinates for surveying.'te/ To specify the !oordinate System for the . C rdinate S. In Datum specify the datum as reOuired for the pro@ection selected. Store %s Chec3 Point Bhen selected. available for all pro@ections on NA. "ore. %ind out more on #rid to #round transformation. Select the Use NADC&N chec5 bo . they are stored as normal points..ob= &..Coo& inate ). !lic5 to set transformation parameters.. the measurements are stored as !hec5 Points to the original points in the monitor listM otherwise.

)owever. Select Geoid from the drop'down list.4-. To be compatible with other manufacturers.4. which was performed using data from I#S trac5ing stations collected during #PS Bee5 &&/8.4-. Topcon provides transformation parameters from B#S4+ to NA.ITR%71< and NA.was first reali?ed in &741.E coordinate pro@ected onto both ellipsoids is 8..#&&/8<.4-fN*fTRANS to reflect the updates to these datums. This set of datum transformation parameters is called NA. . some of which were . "ore. The ma imum discrepancy between a !artesian A.4.datums. during this time there have been no new reali?ations of NA.4-.I.#&&/8< is essentially identical to the International Terrestrial Reference %rame of (888 .where all the parameters are ?ero.4.datum has three independent reali?ations in "A#N$T %ield with respect to the B#S4+ datum= NA. most software manufacturers still consider B#S4+ to be identical with NA.4-.to be identical. The original intent was for B#S4+ and NA. This means B#S4+ eOuals NA.NofTrans. it used the same control stations as B#S4+.datum has remained constant since &741.B#S4+ and #RS48< differs slightly due to the choice of defining constants and number of significant figures. Since this time.& mm at +/ degrees latitude. Recent studies have shown that B#S4+ . Bhat this means is that B#S4+ and NA./.4. using #PS while the NA. Also. Bhen NA.4.4.4.4-. which were accurate to about one meter. There is some confusion between the B#S4+ and NA.. NA. the latest being B#S4+ . NA2-( 2at!/ 2etail' The NA. This is because the B#S4+ datum has been updated over time. there have been several reali?ations of B#S4+. So consider the ellipsoids to be identical.ITR%88<. !onsider the datums to be identical.4. The mathematical definition of the ellipsoids .oppler stations.can no longer be considered identical and are in fact different by more than one meter. The @ob will refer to the selected geoid file to convert ellipsoidal heights to elevations. !lic5 to add the geoid to the list.

Topcon only uses the first seven parameters. )ighlight the name of the desired pro@ection. !reate a custom pro@ection to the list of pre'defined ones by clic5ing the Custom button. These parameters are ta5en from the National #eodetic Survey. three rotations. Ciew all active pro@ections. Repeat the steps to add other pro@ections. (. 2se the arrow button to select the chosen pro@ection in the Pre' . . +. and scale. -.. (. /. and use the scroll bar to view the full list of pro@ections.efined panel and insert it into the Active panel. Pr <ecti n' The Pro@ections dialog contains a list of cataloged pro@ections divided by regions. three translations.4. "ore. !lic5 to add the active pro@ections to the drop'down list in the !oordinate System dialog. -. To add a desired pro@ection to the list in the !oordinate System dialog= In the #re5De!ined panel= &..Topcon also provides another set of datum transformation parameters called NA. that can be chosen for use in the @ob. 2se to delete a highlighted pro@ection from the Active panel if reOuired. !lic5 the region node to e pand the tree of available pro@ections.which reflects the updates to B#S4+. In the Active panel= &.

!lic5 to calculate the rotation from a?imuths on #rid and #round.s or clic5 the !ompute button to calculate a?imuth using points . and East a4es. (.ob )t modes this displays used direction. /..t +more. 4.e coordinates !or t.. 7.2 Avera%e ob 0ei%.. In *rigin Pt and Avg . 3.e Nort. In &ri%in #t mode enter t. &8.t to be used in the transformation.e coordinates !or t.GridAGr !nd Para/eter' To set #rid>#round parameters= &.e &ri%in #oint. -. In Avg .. on how to perform #rid>#round transformation. C /p!te 1 tati n To calculate Rotation from a?imuths on #round and #rid= &.2 or &ri%in #oint +more. 1. $nter the angle value of A?imuth Rotation directly if it is 5nown.. In Scale %actor mode designate combined scale !actor trans!ormation direction. +. These offsets are from the #eodetic North 'Q #round North... "ore.. $nter the Avera%e ob 0ei%... In any Parameters mode resulting combined scale factor will be displayed at the bottom of the dialog for reference purposes.. In #arameters. A?imuths>0earings in turn can be calculated from points in the @ob. Iou can either manually enter the Grid and Ground A1imut. %ind out more.ob )t mode enter the Map Scale Factor from $llipsoid to #rid to be used in the transformation. In Scale Factor or Avera%e ob 0t modes enter *!!sets o! t.. select which set of parameters to enter= Scale !actor +more'''.e ori%in alon% t.. In *rigin Pt and Scale %actor modes directly enter the Combined Scale Factor to be used in the transformation. "ore.e Ground #oint. In &ri%in #t mode select from map. list or enter t.

.in the @ob that define the needed directions.

Creatin$ a C!'t / Pr <ecti n To create a new custom pro@ection= &.(. -. (. Select a Datum from the displayed list of datums. d !lic5 the Delete button to delete a highlighted pro@ection from the list. $nter a Name for the new pro@ection. !lic5 to compute -otation. Ciew the computed A1imut. enter the name of the terminal point or select the point from the map or the list . "ore.user'defined< pro@ections.. -. $nter an angle to Add to A1imut. (. +. C /p!te ABi/!thA6earin$ To compute the a?imuth by two points that define the direction= &.. . In From. d Initially the #ro(ection list is empty.more. If no region is specified. if reOuired. d !lic5 the Edit button to change a pro@ection that was added to the list. or clic5 to create a custom one . Select a Type from the list of sample pro@ections... $nter the -e%ion to which the pro@ection belongs. enter the name of the initial point or select the point from the map or the list .< and then select it. +.. In To. C!'t / Pr <ecti n' This dialog contains a list of custom . !lic5 the Add button to create a new custom pro@ection and add it to the list. it will be added to the #lobal list.

!lic5 Ne4t to enter the new pro@ection specifications depending on the selected sample pro@ection type. $nter the North and South latitudes bounding the area of the custom pro@ection . $nter the false $asting .. "ore./at and Sout. ..user'defined< datums. C!'t / 2at!/' This dialog contains a list of custom .A4isA1imut. $nter the latitude ./.epending on the Type of pro@ection selected. $nter the longitude of Central Meridian for the pro@ection./at<. $nter the Scale that sets a constant scale factor along the central meridian of the custom pro@ection./on?< of a point chosen as the origin on the central meridian of the custom pro@ection. The Bon$itudes are positive for Eastern directions and ne$ative for /estern directions relative to the MT line. 1. +. -.? or N?< of the origin for the pro@ection. /. !lic5 to create the new pro@ection and add it to the Pro@ection list.Note< for the pro@ection. 3. These constant values are added to all negative $astings and Northings to get only positive values of $asting and Northing. $nter a description .Nort. $nter the a?imuth of the a is . you are prompted to fill in some of the following fields. 1. (. and ne$ative for the Southern Cemisphere.Nort.< for the pro@ection. C!'t / Pr <ecti n Specificati n' ./at?< and longitude . NOTICE NOTICE The Batitudes are positive for the Northern Cemisphere. &.East? or E?< and Northing .

.Note< for the datum. $nter the Scale in ppm. enter the .user'defined< ellipsoids. C!'t / 2at!/ Specificati n' "A#N$T %ield uses the seven'parameters )elmert Transformation Strict %ormula for datum transformation. to create the new datum and add it to the . -.. (. .. !lic5 the Add button to create a new custom datum and add it to the list. "ore. In -otations.< and then select it. in seconds. "ore.. dE. $nter a description .atum to Space .. !lic5 Ne4t to enter transformation parameters to convert from B#S4+ to the new datum. In &!!sets. rE. !lic5 list. dI.B#S4+< offsets= dA.d Initially the Datum list is empty. d !lic5 the Edit button to change a datum that was added to the list. d !lic5 the Delete button to delete a highlighted datum from the list.more. rI..atum to Space . +. $nter a Name for the new datum. To create a custom datum= &. Select an Ellipsoid from the displayed list of ellipsoids.B#S4+< rotations= rA. (. +. -. Creatin$ a C!'t / 2at!/ To create a new custom datum= &.atum C!'t / Ellip' id' This dialog contains a list of custom . or clic5 to create a custom one . enter the .

-. d !lic5 the Edit button to change an ellipsoid that was added to the list.. Some $eoid files can &e installed into the eoids folder 30000 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .A< and inverse flattaning . NOTICE NOTICE Install the $eoid file on the dis+ prior to addin$ it to the list. d !lic5 the Delete button to delete a highlighted ellipsoid from the list. /.7)F< as reOuired. !lic5 the Add button to add a new geoid to the list. #eoid undulations are important for converting #PS'derived ellipsoidal height differences to orthometric height differences .. !lic5 to create the new ellipsoid and add it to the list of all the available $llipsoids. +. the A and 7)F fields contains the values for the most common reference ellipsoid defined by B#S4+. !hange the values of ellipsoid semi'ma@or eOuatorial a is . (. enter a description for the ellipsoid. Creatin$ a C!'t / Ellip' id To create a custom ellipsoid= &.. Its shape reflects the distribution of mass inside the $arth.d Initially the Ellipsoid list is empty.. $nter a Name for the ellipsoid. !lic5 the Add button to create a new custom ellipsoid and add it to the list. "ore. The #eoids 9ist dialog contains a list of #eoids available for selection= the Name and Full #at.elevations<. d Initially the Geoid /ist is empty. Note= 0y default. In Note. Ge id' #eoid is the physical reference surface of the $arth. "ore.

files. Select the Geoid Format of the geoid file to load. select a #eoid file from dis5 and see the boundaries for the geoid. d After the geoid is chosen.Global )ettin. !lic5 to add the selected geoid to the list of all the available #eoids in the @obs. Gl &al Settin$' Sets general settings in "A#N$T %ield to use with the currently selected @ob. you can see the boundary of the geoid application= the longitudes and latitudes of the the north'west and south'east corners of the geoid boundary. d After the geoid is chosen. They are provided #ith the installation pro$ram as eoid !ile !ormat -. Addin$ a Ge id In the Add>$dit #eoid dialog. the geoid file appears in the #eoids 9ist dialog. d !lic5 the Edit button to change a geoid that was added to the list. d !lic5 the -emove button to delete a highlighted geoid from the list. !lic5 0rowse to navigate to the desired file on the dis5.s durin$ MA NET !ield installation. In the Global tab= . displays the path to the file. (. To add a geoid to the geoids list= &. -. and select it. After being chosen.$ff.

(. +. #lobal code library to @ob= d Select Never import to create new @obs without automatic import of global codes. *n the New obs tab.Confi. -. m@f. d Select #rompt to import to choose if you want to use locali?ation from the last open @ob. d Select #rompt to import to choose whether to import or not.. Select the Enable ob 0istory chec5 bo to enter and save the surveyorJs operation on the @ob in the file. d Select Always import to automatically import. Iou are able to open the bac5up of the @ob file in the usual way. 3obs &. set parameters to automatically import= &.. Button Sound is the default to provide sound effects when you clic5 any functional button. /ocali1ation !rom previous (ob= d Select Never import to create new @obs without previous locali?ation.R. !lear the bo to automatically connect with the device. To configure bac5up settings= .*&in. #rompt !or Connection is the default to display the !onnections dialog on opening a @ob. Select the Use Bold Font chec5 bo to display the te t in bold typeface. "ore. % & 6ac9!p Settin$' 0ac5up copies are automatically created for the current @ob and safely stored with new names Fa@ob filefnameQRIII'""'.. d Select Always import to automatically e port locali?ation from the last open @ob to a new @ob upon opening the new @ob.ba5F in the Tar%et !older. (.

Three files is the default. change the number of bac5ups to 5eep if reOuired. -. .o& every time you open the . !lic5 #ermanent to change the Target folder. Men*s &. 2se and buttons to move the name up and down in the list to change the order of icons in the )ome screen. Type the new folder name in the bac5up path or select it by clic5ing . !lic5 menu. the D.&a+ file for the current . If you select None. !lic5 the /oc3 Menu button to free?e menus for editing.in the left>top panel<= &.&a+ files previously formed #ill &e over#ritten to the ones #ith the ne#er dates.*&in.o& file durin$ the day #ith another date.o& file is opened in su&se"uent days. To edit the )ome screen . )ighlight the name of the desired icon. If the . NOTICE NOTICE MA NET !ield #ill create a separate D. In 0istory Dept. (.Confi. Select the Fre9uency in which you want the bac5up to occur. to save the settings and return to the )ome C nfi$!rin$ Men!' This allows you to change the view of the )ome screen and the view and contents of the folders within it. +. (.. bac5ups will not be created. Ten minutes is the default.

use the 0rowse button to select the #lobal !ode file to be used along with the codes in the @ob. +. you will be prompted to define the new code when storing points. To edit the folder . . to store the changes and return to the )ome C de' Settin$' To configure global settings for codes= &. The right panel will show the contents of the corresponding folder. Select the bo again to restore the icon in the folder. (. 0y default "A#N$T %ield displays full contents of all the folders. If set to #rompt. clear the bo near the desired name. (. )ighlight the name of the desired )ome icon in the left panel. set the preferred entry mode between Notes and Codes for Survey dialogs. !lic5 to store the changes and open the modified )ome screen. 2se and buttons to move the name up and down in the list to change the order of icons in the folder. set the default type for a new code.in the right>lower panel<= &. If you want to erase a seldom or never used icon in this folder. In De!ault New Type. In Code File. In Data Entry. -. !lic5 screen.-. -.

. select the appropriate bo es in order to be prompted for setting codes in Survey. )ighlight a name of the report configuration to control. +. )ta6e 7e#o&ts NOTICE NOTICE The default code file -TopS2>E?efCodeBi&. The Type of the report configuration. "ore.Confi. !lic5 the Delete button to remove the report configuration from the list.. -. Select a type from the drop down list. To do this. clic5 in the field.. /. !lic5 the Edit button to change the highlighted report configuration. "ore. +. 1ep rt C nfi$!rati n Iou can edit= &. The global setting Code wit. is installed automatically in the tpsdata folder upon MA NET !ield installation. !lic5 the Add button to create a new configuration. (. . C nfi$!rin$ Sta9e 1ep rt' !ontains a list of default configurations of sta5eout reports and their types. Description toggles the display of descriptions with !odes.. !*#*.'ml. The Name of the report configuration.*&in. To edit the list of report configurations= &. In the Code #rompts tab. (. 1. Selecting Alow Custom allows you to custom define the control codes and enables you to set them #ersistent for Survey dialogs. and Sta5e dialogs.

In #assword. Select the corresponding items in the list to include corresponding information in the report. enter the user name of your account. . /. Select /o%in on startup to login upon starting the program.-. !lic5 the Edit button or @ust clic5 the item to open a field to edit the item Name as reOuired. Iou can use Calculator ma5e some calculations if reOuired. -. (. 2se the scroll bar to view the entire list. 2se and arrow buttons to change the order of displayed information in the report. to Enterpri'e C nfi$!re To configure settings for connection to the "agnet $nterprise web' server= &. +. In /o%in. 0y default all items are included. enter the secret word of your account.

$nterprise .in."! $ ports data from the current @ob to a -."! pro@ect.ownloads data from "agnet $nterprise. Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9: To . $nterprise 2pload 2ploads @ob data to "A#N$T $nterprise. %rom ."! pro@ect.ob $ ports data from the current @ob to another @ob."! Imports data from a -.ob Imports data to the current @ob from another @ob. To -. To %ile $ ports data fom the current @ob to a file. 9ata !lic5 the E change icon on the )ome screen to e change data.ownload . %rom %ile Imports data from a file to the current @ob. P/N 7010-0492 4-1 .C-a#te& 4 E%'-an. %rom -.

(. If you do not see the desired @ob name in the list. Exp rt 2ata T % & To select data to be e ported from the current @ob to another @ob= &. 9ata Exp rt T % & To e port data from the current @ob to another @ob= &. It ta5es you to the 0rowse dialog to browse directories to search for the @ob.. "ore. "ore. the Created" and Modi!ied" fields will reflect when the @ob was created and last modified. clic5 Browse. /. %ilter points for e port if reOuired. Iou can e port data to a new @ob. +. Select what specific data of the defined types will be e ported. -.. "ore.in. (. Select an e isting @ob or create a new one to which you will e port data. !lic5 New to create a new @ob. Select % & To select a .. the @ob files are stored in the ]program^Z. )ighlight the @ob in the @ob list. "ore.E%'-an. indicates the path to the selected @ob. 0y default. Ciew the e port progress.efine the general types of data to be e ported.. /. . %rom the #oints drop'down list.. Bhen a @ob is selected in this list. The @ob list contains the ob Names of all e isting @obs created>opened using this software. select the filter for points to e port= d All Points d 0y Point 9ist.ob to open= &.....s< .. +. "ore. -.obs folder.

to ma5e the editable field active. Specify the names of the points to be included. -.. Select the Filter by -an%e chec5 bo . Y. The symbols YMY. !lic5 Settin%s if reOuired to setup e port of points as control.s< d 0y Range and !ode.s<= &.s<. 1an$e and C de?'@ To select for e change points by a range and code. NOTICE NOTICE If availa&le.. Select the corresponding chec5 bo es to select data types. $nter the desired codes either manually or clic5 Select and choose the codes from a dialog which appears.s< d or None (. . Filter P int' 6. Range and !ode. These can be specified by a range or by enumeration indivudually. !lic5 Ne4t to filter the points if reOuired.Y can be used for Name Separator and Y'Y for -an%e Separator. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. +.s< d 0y Type. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out. "ore. Select the Filter by Codes chec5 bo to ma5e the editable field active. Select !odes %or %ilter (.E%#o&t To 3ob d 0y Type. they are e ported as design. clic+ Ne't to continue selectin$ data. 0y default.Y or Y. the &utton appears to start the e'port process. then choose the needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects of the selected data type. which should be e ported. The data that absent in the current @ob will be unavailable for selection.

Select the code. The ob@ects in this dialog are those available in the current @ob. -. !hoose the needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects= d Selection can be done by placing chec5 mar5s in the list ne t to the desired codes. NOTICE NOTICE If the Ne't &utton is availa&le. clic+ it to continue selectin$ data. respectively.ec3 and Unc. .s< list. (. Bhen filtering points by types. d !lic5 C.s< on and off. d !lic5 C.s< on and off. &.Select O&<ect' t Exp rt The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for e port. d !lic5 Select All to choose all the items at a time. Select C de' F r Filter All the codes e isting in the current @ob will be listed in the !ode. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out. against the desired codes.s< for which you want to e change all the points having that code= d Selection can be done by placing chec5 mar5s in the list. d !lic5 Select All to choose all the items at a time. respectively.ec3 to toggle the highlighted item. the &utton appears to start the e'port process.ec3 and Unc. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected.ec3 to toggle the highlighted item. the e isting types of points will be available for selection.

s< d 0y Range and !ode. The dialog enables you to select the data to import and. I/p rt 2ata Fr / % & The title of this dialog conains the name of the @ob selected. (.. "ore..s<.s< d 0y Type. "ore. %rom the #oints drop'down list. "ore.. %ilter points for import if reOuired. +.. /. if necessary. I/p rt Fr / % & To import data from another @ob to the current @ob= &. select the filter for points to import= d All Points d 0y Point 9ist.efine the general types of data to be imported.. The progress bar displays the percentage of the points being e ' ported. Select the @ob from which you will import data.. Exp rt 5arnin$' display the warning messages during the $ ' port process if necessary.. . Ciew the import progress.. "ore. Range and !ode.s< d 0y Type. Select what specific data of the defined types will be imported.s< d or None .. filter the imported points= &..(+#o&t F&o+ 3ob Exp rt Stat!' The e port process is reflected in the $ port Status dialog that contains a progress bar and comments about the e port process. "ore. -.

The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. "ore.. the &utton appears to start the import process. &. the e isting types of points will be available for selection. clic+ it to continue selectin$ data. $nter the desired codes either manually or clic5 !hec5 . d !lic5 C. Select the Filter by Codes chec5 bo to ma5e the editable field active. !lic5 Settin%s if reOuired to setup import of points as control. Select O&<ect' t I/p rt The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for import.E%'-an. 9ata (. +. !hoose needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects= d Selection can be done by placing chec5 mar5s in the list ne t to the desired codes.s<= &. Filter P int' 6. then choose the needed ob@ects from a list of ob@ects of the selected data type. respectively. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out. they are imported as design. d !lic5 Select All to choose all the items at a time. The data that absent in the current @ob will be unavailable for selection.s< on and off. (.in.ec3 and Unc. NOTICE NOTICE If the Ne't &utton is availa&le. 0y default.ec3 to toggle the highlighted item. !lic5 Ne4t to filter the points if reOuired.. Bhen filtering points by types. -. The ob@ects in this dialog are those available in the current @ob. Select the corresponding chec5 bo es to select data types which should be imported. 1an$e and C de?'@ To select for e change points by a range and code. -.

.Y can be used for Name Separator and Y'Y for -an%e Separator. /.. .E%#o&t To File and choose the codes from a dialog which appears.. select the points types to e port. Set a name and destination directory for the file... "ore. The progress bar displays the percentage of the points being imported. The symbols YMY. Set the code style if needed.. the &utton appears to start the import process. If reOuired. Select the Filter by -an%e chec5 bo . 1. Select the data type and the file format to which you will e port data as reOuired. After the Ne't &utton &ecomes $reyed out. If reOuired. -.. (.. Specify the names of the points to be included. I/p rt Stat!' The import process is reflected in the Import Status dialog that contains a progress bar and comments about the import process. +..Y or Y. "ore. I/p rt 5arnin$' display the warning messages during the Im' port process if necessary. %ilter points for e port if reOuired. NOTICE NOTICE If the Ne't &utton is availa&le. clic+ it to continue selectin$ data.. "ore. These can be specified by a range or by enumeration indivudually. "ore. Select !odes %or %ilter (. to ma5e the editable field active. "ore. Y. Exp rt T File To e port data from the current @ob to a file= &. The Ne't &utton is availa&le until all data of chosen types is selected. select file units for data to be e ported.

)ori?ontal Alignments. These conditions are the use of the same type for the attributes and the use of Ouotes for the te t values. Certical Alignments. A'Section Templates. Select types o$ the points !hec5 this field if not all types of points should be e ported . Set the coordinate system and coordinate type for e ported points. Select $ile units !hec5 this field to set units for values in the file. The AS!II %Ile Properties field appears only when points are being e ported to a file of te t type.only for Points data type<.ata.ata Select the data type to e port to the file= Points.efine the conditions of the e ported file interpretation.3. Roads. . Format Select the corresponding type of the file for e port of the data type you selected. Surfaces . "ore. . Scanning . A'Section Sets.only for Points data type<. !ode 9ibrary. 9ayers or "ultiple Types. "ore. Roads Survey. 4. Exp rt 2ata T File The To File dialog is used to e port different data types to files with either predefined or custom formats..efine settings for custom te t formats.. 9ines.ata. Point 9ists. Setup . .by code and by range< should be used for e ported points . 9ocali?ation..TINs<..B# Settings %or $ port . (se $ilters !hec5 this field if filters .ob )istory.. 7.. %SCII $ile properties . Ciew the e port progress. "ore. Raw .A%>.

Co&e Separator $nter the separator to delimit the multiple codes. All saved code styles are available in the list. !ode Style Separators !ontrol !odes C de St. .tp-< formats. #eoPA6 and $agle Point. 2sing arrows.le Set!p This dialog allows you to setup a code style for the !ustom Te t.if it e ists< is placed in the brac5ets after the name of the corresponding control code. move the necessary items from the Available column to the right part the *rder column in the desired order.le Separat r' This dialog lists the current separators for the selected code style. Control Co&e Separator $nter the separator to delimit the control code. "ote Separator $nter the separator to delimit the note.S RAB and "! pro@ect . The current "A#N$T %ield control code value . The changes are applied only for the selected style.C de St. %+aila!le $iel&s $or co&e style Iou can combine any available fields to the one code style. !arlson. String Separator $nter the separator to delimit the code string. Initially four predefined styles are available= Topcon. 9ist o$ co&e styles Iou can add>delete any code style. C ntr l C de' This dialog lists the control codes which can be replaced by user' defined values during an e port routine. T.

Alignments. This option is available for all data types and formats containing distance>angular values. TS Raw . -ectangle 4-6: Calue of the Recangle control code. you can set only distance. Select 2ata F r Exp rt T File This dialog lists the available data to e port depending on the selected format. 0y Type. Surfaces. !odes. None.ata. or distance and angle units if available. . A'sections . 9ine Start: Calue of the 9ine Start control code. 9ine En&: Calue of the 9ine $nd. 0y Type.%rc Start 4%S6: Calue of the Arc Start control code. Close 4C6: Calue of the !lose control code. The control ne t to this selection lists the number of the corresponding elements in the @ob. 9ines.ata and #PS Raw . Points Select the filter for the points to e port from the drop'down menu= All Points. Selection !hec5 the control after the appropriate data type to e port. File 0nit' This dialog allows you to select units for the data being e changed. Range and !ode. 0y Range and !ode. Select Filter' F r P int' This dialog is used to select the points filters for the file e port. %rc En& 4%E6: Calue of the Arc $nd control code.templates<. 41010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Possi!le &ata types Points.epending on the data and format selected.

Select File Format Selects the order of the fields in the imported file. Point Style P/N 7010-0492 41111 . . Sa+e Saves the %ile Style and returns to the Te t %ile %ormat dialog.9at>9on< drop'down menu in the 9at>9on Record %ormat dialog.the Available column< to the right part . move the necessary items from the left part of the dialog .Settin$' F r Text C!'t / F r/at' The Te t %ile %ormat dialog allows you to select the format for the Te t %ile. 4atit!deA4 n$it!de 1ec rd F r/at %rom the %ormat . Set!p 2CFA25G Settin$' F r Exp rt Iou can select the styles of the point>lines for output. A new string appears in the Select %ile format drop'down menu. Select %ields %or !ustom %ormats Select Field' F r C!'t / F r/at' 2sing arrows.elimiter Select the separator symbol between the data in the import file.the *rder column< in the desired order. E&it Format Allows you to change an e isting file format with the help of the !ustom Style dialog. tab or other . It can be a space. select the desired format to represent data being imported from>e ported to the file. a comma. %&& Format Allows you to create a new file format with the help of the !ustom Style dialog.select from the list<.

Select the data type and the file format from which you will import data as reOuired. 9ine Style d AutoCAD /ines= only line coordinates. d TopSU-* /ine Bloc3s= the default TopS2RC style will be used. Select settings for importing points. units<. strings and attributes. select file units for imported data.. elevations. "ore.. strings and attributes.. codes. it is auto. (se . I/p rt Fr / File To import data from a file to the current @ob= &. 41212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . codes.. coor&inates !hec5 this button to e port elevations with plain coordinates as well. d TopSU-* #oint Bloc3s= the default TopS2RC style will be used. points will be used. d Carlson #oint Bloc3s= !arslon point bloc5s will be used. If reOuired. d AutoCAD #oints wit. d AutoCAD /ines wit.. (. Te4t Fields= point coordinates with te t fields for point name. elevation. . It includes line name. d Civil @D)/and Des3top #oint &b(ects= !ivil -..!hoose one from the available styles= d AutoCAD #oints= only point coordinates. elevations. -.. "ore. codes and attributes.in !A. Select the file from which data will be imported.efine settings for custom te t formats. +. It includes point name. !hec5 mar5 this bo to open a field to manually> automatically set the height of te t fonts to show the te t .. "ore. "ore. /. (se te t $ont height 0y default.. codes and attributes. elevation. Te4t Fields= line coordinates with te t fields for line name.

ata. Point 9ists and "ultiple data types< Select the type of the points you import= P/N 7010-0492 41313 . A'Section Templates. Select $ile units This option is available for all data types and formats containing distance>angular values.TINs<. )ori?ontal Alignments. Certical Alignments. Settings %or Te t !ustom %ormats Import of "ultiple . Point 9ists... 9ayers or "ultiple Types.(+#o&t F&o+ File 1.only for Points. Bhen this chec5bo is selected.ata Types Set!p Settin$' F r I/p rt Set the type of the imported points= Import Points %s . "ore.. A' Section Sets. . Settings Set the type of the imported points. Scanning . 9ines. Ciew the import status.. or distance and angle units if available. Format Select the corresponding type of the file being imported for the data type you selected. I/p rt 2ata Fr / File The From File dialog is used to import different data types from files with either predefined or custom formats. you can set only distance. the Ne t button opens the %ile 2nits screen that allows you to select units for imported data. "ore. . Surfaces . 9ocali?ation.epending on the data and format selected.ata Select the data type to import from the file= Points. 3. Set up the coordinate system and coordinate type for imported data. !ode 9ibrary. Roads.

. 5nown from the catalog. d Desi%n #oints= points used as targets for sta5ing.epending 41414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . 4i't f I/p rted O&<ect' This dialog shows the list with the ob@ects loaded from the file. 9ata d Control #oints= the points with coordinates. Select $ile units Bhen this chec5 bo is selected.B# file. Exp rt T (2MC The To )C Pro#ect dialog starts the procedure of e port of different data types from a -. all data from the file will be stored as a set of the points>lines within a @ob. tp.pe' After loading data from the file you can select the data types you want to import.in.E%'-an. Format Sets the U. There are several options to customi?e import from .A%>. 9oa& as !ac3groun& image Select this chec5 bo to import data from the file as a bac5groud image.ata The multiple type of data is available for e port.type of the "! pro@ect file. Import !loc3 !ase points Select this chec5 bo to import bloc5 base coordinates as points. These are used for locali?ation."! pro@ect to the current "A#N$T @ob. the Ne t button opens the %ile 2nits screen that allows you to select units for the data e ported. If the bo is unchec5ed. This will not happen if import of point lists has been selected. . I/p rt f M!ltiple 2ata T. !hec5 the control before the appropriate ob@ect to import.

codes. you can set only distance. the %ile 2nits screen displays to allow you to select units for the data imported. These are used for locali?ation. .isplays a number at which "A#N$T %ield will start renaming points with alphanumeric names as the T.ata The multiple type of data is available for import. tp. "A#N$T %ield will continue numbering from the last previous number of the @ob point.epending on the data and format selected. or distance and angle units if available. 5nown from the catalog."! pro@ect to the current "A#N$T @ob.S format demands points that have only numerical names.(+#o&t F&o+ 39MC on the data and format selected. %lphanumeric points 'ill !e renum!ere& starting at: . control codes. E port areas as lines Select this chec5 bo to e port area data from the current @ob or line data to the "! pro@ect. Select $ile units Bhen this chec5 bo is selected. . Settings Sets the type of the imported points= d Control #oints= the points with coordinates. P/N 7010-0492 41010 . or distance and angle units if available. I/p rt Fr / (2MC The From )C Pro#ect dialog starts the procedure of import of different data types from a -. Format Shows only the U. strings and notes< to e port to the file.type of the "! pro@ect file. Co&e Style *pens the !ode Style dialog to set a format for point properties . you can set only distance.

clic5 -e!res. the names and types of available inbo es appear. the following options are available= 41111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . -.s< to be downloaded. Upload status will show the upload progress and the result. the names and types of the inbo es appear in the field. The name and path to the file will be displayed in the corresponding field. Enterpri'e 2 =nl ad To download uploaded data from an enterprise pro@ect to your device= &.E%'-an. -. +. Select a #ro(ect from a list of available pro@ects. !lic5 Upload to start uploading data to the selected inbo . Enterpri'e 0pl ad To upload data from the current @ob to an enterprise pro@ect= &. +. 9ata d Desi%n #oints= points used as targets for sta5eout. to renew the content of the selected inbo .in. 2!plicate &<ect' The dialog is being shown when an ob@ect with the same name as the imported one already e ists in the @ob. (. Select the file. !lic5 Add to upload a file. Select the inbo that contains the needed files. If reOuired. If reOuired. After you select the pro@ect. After you select the pro@ect. . clic5 Clear All to erase selections. !hec5 mar5 the desired inbo . !lic5 Download to start downloading data to your device. Download status will show the download progress and the result.epending on the ob@ect type. (. The names of the uploaded files and the dates of uploading appear. Select a #ro(ect from a list of available pro@ects.

Pre$i < The entered prefi will be added to the imported ob@ect name.9*#li'ate ob:e'ts 5+er'rite< The ob@ect in the database will be overwritten with the imported one. P/N 7010-0492 41717 . -ename< The imported ob@ect will be renamed. Su$$i < The entered suffi will be added to the imported ob@ect name.

in.E%'-an. 9ata Notes2 41515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

-. d !lic5 the Start C. d Type in the massage you want to post to the selected user. To ma5e the list show last receipients of your messages. !lic5 the icon for te t messaging. To start chatting= d Select the user you want to chat with by chec5ing the bo near the name.at button to initiate conversation. P/N 7010-0492 0-1 . (.at dialog contains two tabs= The Contacts tab displays a list of the names of all "A#N$T $nterprise users who are currently assigned to a chat. To ma5e the list show only the users with online presence status. &.C-a#te& 0 C-attin. select the Recent !ontacts chec5 bo that appears if there have been any contacts. Iou will see the users who are ready for immediate connection. The C. The %cti+e Chats tab displays a list of the users with whom you have already started chatting. chec5 the &nly &nline bo .

C-attin. Notes2 0-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

Raw . 9inewor5 $dits the linewor5 properties and create new linewor5s manually. !odes $dits code properties and add new codes.C-a#te& 1 E itin. P/N 7010-0492 1-1 .ata $dits raw data and recompute coordinates. Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9: Points $dits properties of e isting points and add new points manually. 9ayers $dits layer properties and add new layers manually. Point 9ists $dits point lists. Areas $dits areas. 3ob 9ata !lic5 the icon to open the $dit folder.

eletes the point from the list. %&& . Roads *pens a subfolder with si options to edit the road properties and design new roads. 0y !ode. 0y !ode String. Sta5e Reports $dits sta5e reports. etc. Edit P int' The Points dialog contains the list of the stored points with their coordinates and codes. . code. Settings 1-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . 0y Radius.eletes>adds bac5ground images. 0y Name or 0y 9ayer. coordinates. E&it *pens a dialog to edit the selected pointYs parameters li5e name.isplays a dialog to create a new point.elete . 3ob 9ata Images . Fin& "e t %inds the ne t point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous %ind. Fin& !y Point Select an option from the drop'down list to find a point= 0y Range.E itin. Sessions $dits observation sessions for #NSS receivers.

a control code. Select the codes of the 9ine type to use for such points. d Press the !ode button to view information on the code. and attribute values for the code..isplay !onfiguration dialog. 4ine= r9 Pac9a$e Additional manipulations of linewor5 can be performed using control codes for the points with the same code'string combination. (. The display of coordinates depends on the selected coordinate system. "ore. "ore. Arc parameters are determined by the presence of additional points in the line. Iou can set two control codes..E it Points *pens the . +. select the Control #oint chec5 bo to use the point as a control point for locali?ation.. P int Inf This page contains information about the point to be added>edited. if reOuired. A$. These points can create P/N 7010-0492 1-3 . and R control line behavior= &. Set a string and. The AS and A$ control codes indicate the start and the end of an arcM respectively. Iou can edit this information= &. 2p to two control codes can be specified for every code associated with a point to store the points which will be connected to form open or closed polylines. !ode needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it is not a code that e ists in the !odes dialog d If the code type is 9ine or Area. -. The supported control codes of AS. Name of the point.. !. an icon will display that the point belongs to a line. !ode and attribute information for the point. d Iou can select a code from the drop'down list. If reOuired.

the points are all connected &y strai$ht line se$ments. In this case. attributes and control code. 1-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . The R control code is applied to the third point of a three point polyline. NOTICE NOTICE MA NET !ield #ill not use this line#or+ pac+a$e if the Allo# Custom Control Code &o' on the lo&al screen is chec+ed. If there are t#o. Co&e Shows the selected code. NOTICE NOTICE If only one point is &et#een the arc start and end points.E itin. the arc is formed such that all the three points lie on the arc. Ctrl Co&e The control code list shows all the control codes used. MA NET !ield #ill not interpret these control codes. A code can be selected from the drop' down list. -. The !ontrol !ode is a special type of code that can be used by some graphic tools for the interpretation of the survey results. &et#een the points #ith the AS and AE control codes. Bhen the ! control code is applied to a point. it connects it to the starting point of the line. the user can enter any strin$ to mar+ it as a control code. and results in the automatic creation of a fourth point of a parallelogram whose diagonal is specified by the first and the third point. C de " Attri&!te' The !ode Attributes tab allows you to select a code and its associated string. or more than t#o points. 3ob 9ata the line segment with the arc start>or end point which will act as the tangent to the arc. (. thus closing the line.

.isplays a list of all codes. "ore.. M!lti"C de .NOTICE NOTICE A second control code can &e added to the code &y turnin$ on the option for a second control code in the top left menu item. which displays the valid ranges $or the attri!utes $or the selecte& co&e. "ore.elete . strings and attributes for the point being edited.elete a code from the list... "ore. %&& Add a code to the list. clic5 on this button... E&it $dit the selected code in the list. %ttri! -ange *pens the Attribute Ranges dialog. %ttri!utes 9ist The list shows the available attributes for the code and allows you to enter>select its value. )ultiple Co&es To add multiple codes. NOTICE NOTICE A strin$ can &e added to the code &y turnin$ on the option for strin$s in the top left menu item.. String $nter a string for the code. .

In RT6 surveys.isplay must be the same as for the 5nown coordinates of the observed Topo point. (. This dialog enables you to= d &verwrite on the e isting point d -ename the point to store as another point d or Store as c. +.ec3 point to the e isting point -. if chec5ed.isplays the offsets of the point you are trying to save from the point that is saved. . you can correct the base position if an observed Topo point has 5nown coordinates stored in the @ob and has the same name as the base.erASt. After either closing the Topo dialog or moving to another tab. a dialog displays a prompt that the point already e ists... If you select to store the point as a chec5 point.P int Chec9 If a point e ists and you try to save another point with the same name. the coordinate type selected in . recomputations are performed. The 5nown coordinates of the observed point are not replaced with the observed coordinates and are used to correct the 0ase coordinates. you can enable using it in weighted averaging positions. 4a. &. and the coordinates of all points are updated using the new 0ase coordinates. !lic5 the F. In this case. Point Style Select the point type and color to be used with the point..F to $dit 9ayers. "ore. the Correct base option allows you to setup the 0ase at un5nown position. chec5 Use in wei%.le 9ayer Select the 9ayer in which to have the Point. Note= %or Correct Base to wor5 properly. . To do this..ted avera%e.

!lic5 either Browse to select a photo from e isting ones or Capture to capture an image using the controller. To edit the photo note= /.whether its used or not<. Note= If the controller supports the camera. the appropriate action will be ta5en ' the point is added for the BA or e cluded from the BA. there will be two options available. "ore. Ph t N te P p !p /en! d If reOuired.. Bhen you clic5 on this button. !lic5 Add to attach an image to the note. there will be two options available. 3. 2se the ?? and @@ buttons to scroll through the photos attached to the point. Also displayed are the $. clic5 S.. 2 residuals. Note= If the controller supports the camera.5A 9ist control displays list of stations that can be used in the Beighted Average for the point. N.ow Coordinates and the B#S4+ location of . 4. and notes. BA !ontrol .ow Coordinates to display the coordinate system and the coordinates of this point over the photos. Ph t N te This displays a photo note attached to the point. The pop'up menu in the top left corner of the screen contains three additional options for a photo note. Note= If you select S. !lic5 Delete to remove the photo note currently displayed for the point. (se in =%>E clu&e $rom =% Select a point in the 9ist control. !lic5 either Browse to select a photo from e isting ones or Capture to capture an image using the controller. 1. !lic5 Edit to delete the currently seleted photo and attach a different one instead.

Also. After you select one or &oth options for one photo. Note= If you s5ip the calibration. clic5 the S3ip button to ignore the compass calibration. C /pa'' Cali&rati n The !ompass !alibration dialog allows you to process the compass calibration. The selections #ill &e lost #hen the device is shut do#n. the !ompass !alibration dialog will prompt you to calibrate the compass before ta5ing a photo . the coordinates will be displayed in . the application #ill +eep the selections. the Sho# Coordinates and Sho# ?irection options are unchec+ed. The application provides a graphic image describing calibration movement. no coordinates will be displayed or saved in the image.ow Direction to display compass readings ta5en at the time you ta5e the photo note. Iou can calibrate the compass any .the point is available. Note= The direction is displayed over the photos provided the compass has been calibrated. d If reOuired.. Iou will be able to calibrate the compass any time by clic5ing the Calibrate Compass option enabled in the pop up menu. clic5 S. you will not be prompted again as long as you edit the point. and no direction will be provided even if the S.o&. This option is enabled for the device that supports the camera and the compass. you can turn on or off Sho# Coordinates and Sho# ?irection from the Settin$s dialo$ in the Ima$e Capture dialo$.ow Direction is selected. If you s5ip the calibration.""SSSS formatM otherwise. d If you do not want to process the calibration. d Bhen you first open the Photo Note tab and select the S. NOTICE NOTICE /hen you first open the .ow Direction option. you will not be prompted again as long as you edit the point.if not already calibrated<. The !ompass !alibration dialog appears automatically only once.

Iou can turn on or turn off S. PT9 5$$sets 9ine defines the distance along the line from the %rom Point. As5s the user if they would li5e to= *verwrite on the e isting point . d !lic5 the Start button to start calibration. 5$$set defines the distance in a direction perpendicular to the line.. PT4 This page is displayed when the point is a PT9 point or when the PT9 mode is slected when adding a point. 5$$sets . %or e ample. this dialog appears. 0eight is the height differnce between the %rom Point and the current poin P int Chec9 If a point e ists and we try to save another point with the same name. The calibration time depends on the device used.ow Coordinates and S.efines the 9ine for the PT9 offsets.ow Direction from the Settings dialog that displays by clic5ing the Settings button in the top right corner of the dialog. From Point. "ore.. I/a$e Capt!re The Image !apture dialog allows you to ta5e a photo note for the point. it is &8 seconds for the %!'(-1.time by clic5ing the Calibrate Compass option enabled in the pop up menu. These points can be selected from the @ob by clic5ing on 9ist. and 18 seconds for the #RS'& device.isplays the offsets of the point we are trying to save from the point that is saved. To Point .

highlighting the point if it is found. 11010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Find &. the !oordinates of the chec5 point and any Notes associated with the chec5 point. highlighting the point if it is found. The list displays the Name of the chec5 point. Find &. the d$. C de The %ind by !ode dialog contains a form for searching a point by its code. "ame The name or part of the name of a point. )atch entire name Set if the whole name was entered in the Point Name field. Co&e Select the code from the list which is to be searched. )atch partial name Set if a part of the searched name was entered in the Point Name field. Chec9 P int' This page is present if the point has any chec5 points associated with it.Rename the point to store as another point or whether to save it as a !hec5 Point to the e isting point. P int The %ind by Point dialog contains a form for searching a point by its name. Search Starts the search process and returns to the Points dialog. dN. and d) vector of the chec5 point from the recorded point. Search Starts the search process and returns to the Points dialog.

%&& *pens the blan5 !ode or the Attribute dialog . P/N 7010-0492 11111 . dN. %ttri!utes 9ists the attributes of the selected code. C de " Attri&!te' !ontains a list of codes used for the survey. The Name of the code. C de To create a new code or edit an e isting code. The Description for the code. Co&es 9ist of codes in the . . (.depending upon the list below which the button is located< with the properties of the highlighted entry.eletes the highlighted entry. the !oordinates of the sta5ed out point and any Notes associated with the sta5ed out point.ob. the list of attributes for each code. and a set of tools for editing. enter the code details= &. The list displays the Name of the chec5 point.depending upon the list below which the button is located<. and d) vector of the sta5ed out point from the recorded point.Att&ib*tes C!t Sheet This page is present if this point has been sta5ed out and the sta5eout point stored. A new attribute can be added only if at least one code e ists and it is highlighted.Co e . E&it *pens the !ode or the Attribute dialog .elete . the d$.

Set the minimum and the ma imum values of the attribute. Te4t. style and thic5ness for the boundary. d Te4t" Select this if the attribute value is an alpha'numeric string. Bool2 Date5Time2 8nte%er2 Menu or -eal Number.s< that can be edited. /ine or Area. d /ine" Set a symbol for nodes. as a Brea3eline or>and an E4clusion Area +. The values are entered in the field and added to the list with the Add button. d Date5Time" 2se the default . $ach type has an associated settings that can be edited. and color. and color.etermine a /ayer for the code if reOuired. filling style and transparency for the area. Set the ma imum number of characters you can enter. Node< d DTM" Select the corresponding chec5 bo on this tab to use the code in DTM. . (. The Type of the ob@ects that the code describes= #oint. The Name of the attribute. d Attribute" Select the radio buttons on this tab to enter the code at the beginning of a line>area . d Menu" Select this to assign a list of values to select for the attribute. 3ob 9ata -. The Type of the attribute. d Area" Set a symbol for nodes. $ach type has an associated plotting style. d Bool" Select a boolean value. 11212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .Eac. d #oint= Set a symbol and attributes for points and color.current date< and time for the code attribute or set the date and time from the drop'down list. d 8nte%er" Select this if the attribute value is an integer. style and thic5ness for lines.Start< or at every node point along the line>area .E itin. Attri&!te' &.

. Then type the string in the FDF field and press the Add button.o notice that the double clic5 on map and property buttons are disabled if accessing this dialog from the Alignment Pair dialog. Control Co&e The control code list. The dialog contains a table of !odes and Attributes. It can be any string. To view the current selected linewor5 in a larger map. Set the minimum and ma imum values of the attribute. -. the default value will be always used for the code attribute automatically. If the bo is not selected. It shows all the used control codes and also allows one to enter a new control code. Select the -e9uired chec5 bo to be prompted to enter the attribute value every time when using the corresponding code.ine4o&6 d -eal Number" Select this if the attribute value is a real number. double' clic5 one of the map plots. C ntr l C de The !ontrol !ode is a special type of code that can be used by the graphic tool for the interpretation of the survey results. P/N 7010-0492 11313 . that present the general view of the selected linewor5 in the hori?ontal and vertical planes. . insert the name of the code in the !ode field or choose it from the code list and set the attributes. The De!ault value for the code attribute. one can use the "ultiple !odes tool. The new entry appears in the table. 4ine= r9 The 9inewor5 dialog contains a list of e isting 9inewor5s on the left part of the dialog. M!ltiple C de Strin$' If it is necessary to add several strings to an ob@ect. To add a code string to the table. and the two windows on the right part.

%&& !reate a new area. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys. and the two windows on the right side that represent the view of the selected area in the hori?ontal and vertical planes. 11414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . %&& Add a 9inewor5 with this button.elete Press to delete the selected 9ine from the list. 9ist o$ Points The list of currently selected points.E itin. 3ob 9ata E&it *pens the $dit 9ine dialog. P int' in Area . E&it $dit the Area selected in the list. Edit Area !ontains a list of e isting areas on the left side of the screen. Press to edit the properties of the selected 9ine. .elete Remove the highlighted Area from the list. The up and down arrows to the left of 9ist of Points allow you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points in the area. . %rea The name of the Area.isplays a list of e isting points in the selected Area and the general view of the area boundary.

P int 4i't' The 9ist of Point 9ists dialog contains a list of e isting Point 9ists on the left part of the dialog.Point . and the two windows on the right part. 9ine nodes . From Map Select the points by clic5ing them on the mapM points that are seOuentially clic5ed are connected with a line to arrange an area. From /ist Select the points from the list of points. By Code Strin% Select the codes and strings with which the points are added to the line.ists %rea +ie' Area is bound with a closed line.isplays five methods of adding points to the beginning of the line= By Code Select the codes with which the points are added to the area. To view the current selected point list in a larger map. The A symbol deletes the highlighted point from the area. Select Points . The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list. The point highlighted in the list of points will be mar5ed with a yellow circle. Point In$o Shows the point information of the currently selected single point. P/N 7010-0492 11010 . that present the general view of the selected list in the hori?ontal and vertical planes. double'clic5 one of the map plots.points< have the same code of area type to form an area boundary. From /ine Select all points from the line.

. Adding the point to the list can be performed in two ways. Point 9ist "ame The name of the Point 9ist. The large "ap dialog opens. Press to create a new 9ist. E&it *pens the $dit Point 9ist dialog. Select the points by tapping them on the map ' the two conseOuently tapped points will be connected with line. d T. d T. and %rom 9ist. 0y !ode. chec5 the codes. 0y Radius.rou%.E itin. Press to edit the properties of the selected 9ist.rou%.e Select #oints button" pressing the button displays the floating menu of five items= 0y Range. P int 4i't The Point 9ist tab shows the general properties of the Point 9ist. set the center point and the radius of the area. t. 11111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . %rom "ap. Copy Press to create a copy of the selected 9ist. select the points from the map or using the list. t. 0y !odeString. Select the desired way of adding points and fill in the suggested form= set the range. Press !lose to return to the Add>$dit Point 9ist dialog. 3ob 9ata %&& *pens the Add Point 9ist dialog. Point In$o Shows the point information of a current selected single point.e map" tap the plot on the right. The 2p and down arrows to the left of 9ist of points allows the user to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.elete Press to delete the selected Points 9ist from the list. 9ist o$ Points The list of currently selected points.

C de Strin$' Co&e Select the code by selecting it from the combobo .F can &e used for Name Separators and F<F for a >an$e Separator.ists The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. around the selected Point the user wants Points added to the 9ist. Select P int' &. 1an$e -ange o$ Points $nter here the range of points the user would li5e included in the selected Points 9ist NOTICE NOTICE The sym&ols F=F. 1adi!' Point Select the point either by entering it manually or by selecting it from the map or list. The A symbol deletes the highlighted point from the list.Point . This will be the center of the circle. Select P int' 6. Select P int' &. -a&ius $nter the Radius. F. String P/N 7010-0492 11717 . Select P int' &. C de Select Points 'ith Co&es Select the codes for which we want to add all the points having that code.distance< for which. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list.F or F.

(p>. %&& Add a new 9ayer. and if it is the default layer<.er 9ayer "ame Name of the 9ayer.efault layer cannot be deleted.Select the strings you would li5e to use for the codestring combination. Ins Insert a new 9ayer after the currently selected one in the 9ist.el . 4a.elete the selected 9ayer. The layer to be deleted should not have any ob@ects. 4a. The icon to the left of the name indicates whether it is visible or not. . .whether it is empty or has ob@ects. E&it $dit the selected 9ayer. P int 4i't Chec9 If a Points 9ist e ists with the same name it prompts the user to select if he wants to overwrite e isting one or rename the Points 9ist. 7isi!le !hec5 to ma5e this layer Cisible.er' 9ayer 9ist 9ist of 9ayers with Names and Status .o'n %rro's "ove the selected 9ayer up or down in the ordering. .

C l r Palette Color Select the !olor for the ob@ects to be displayed on the map. 9ayer Color Select the color for the lines and points in this layer. also the Strings associated with the codes if String display is selected.ata listed includes information on the= d Name= Point name and the icon displaying the type of the point. 9ines and Alignments belonging to the Raw . St.ata The Raw .a. Point Type Select the icon for the points to be displayed in this layer. . d Notes. d Ctrl Code= !ontrol codes associated with the point.le 9ine Style Select the Style for the lines to be displayed in this layer and also the width. d Codes= !odes for the point. d Coordinates= !oordinates of the point.e&s "ote $nter a note here for the 9ayer. O&<ect' .isplay a list of Point. d 08)Ant 0t= %or the *ptical mode ' the height of the instrumentM %or the #PS: mode ' the antenna height. d Type= The type of measurement..

-ecompute Recomputes the point coordinates after editing the pointYs raw data.E itin.ow -aw G#S$)TS= If the #PS: mode is active. d S. Fin& !y Co&e %inds a point by its code. E&it *pens the $dit Raw . The button in the upper'left corner of the dialog enables the following menu= d ob 8n!o= displays the . select this menu. %or points collected in the #PS mode. First>9ast "oves the cursor to the first or last point. Fin& "e t %inds ne t point that satisfies the same conditions as the previous found point.. the #PS: raw data is displayed by default. 3ob 9ata d /ocal Time= It is the controller time when the point was stored. Fin& !y Point %inds a point by its name or a part of its name. "ore.ob Info dialog. its the time of the epoch whose coordinates are stored or the time of the last accepted epoch when averaging.ata dialog which allows one to edit user entered raw data. !lic5 the option to get the Angle Sets Report. 12020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . If you want to display the TS raw data in the list.. d An%le Sets -eport= This menu item will only be displayed when we are in TS mode and the @ob contains angle sets which have been acOuired. if you are using the *ptical mode. Similarly. the TS raw data is displayed and optionally the #PS: raw data.

;a,e&s

Set!p Selecti n
An angle set is a group of total station observations at the occupation point which are ta5en at the same time and constitute a measurement to a point. This group can have a number of different foresight and bac5sight seOuences. The Setup Selection dialog displays a list of all of the occupations in the @ob which have angle sets associated with them. The &ccupation column displays the points where the occupations was set up. The ASets column displays the number of angle sets ta5en at the occupation. The 08 column will displays the instrument height of the occupation. To generate an angle sets report= d Select the chec5bo es associated with the occupations for which you want to get the report. d To select all the occupations in the list, clic5 Select All. d To erase all selections of occupations, clic5 Clear All' d !lic5 the -eport button to generate the Angle Sets Report.

An$le Set' 1ep rt
The Angle Sets Report allows you= d To review detailed report information on the individual angle sets of only the occupations selected in the Setup Selection dialog. d To save the generated report to a file. To do this, clic5 the icon

. The file will be saved in the Report folder.

Edit 1a= 2ata
The $dit Raw .ata dialog displays the properties of the selected record and allows the user to change the name, code, notes, and record specific parameters. .isplays either the "ar5 or P! ;Phase !enter< !oords of the base station. The point, code and antenna information is available for
P/N 7010-0492

12121

E itin. 3ob 9ata

display and editing only if we have the "ar5 !oordinates available for the base. The "ar5 coordinates can be edited only if the point was manually entered or if its a design point. The P! coordinates cannot be edited.

4i't

f Sta9e 1ep rt'

.isplays a list of e isting reports in the @ob. The red asteris5 icon near the report name means that the report is set as current for this type. 7ie' Show the full report selected. ,elete Remove the highlighted report from the list. The user will have twice to confirm deletion before the report data is deleted. E&it $dit the report selected in the list. %&& !reate a new report.

Edit Sta9e 1ep rt
Name $nter the name of the report selected. Report Type Select the report type from the list. !onfiguration $dit the report configuration for the report type selected in the list. Set !urrent If chec5ed, set a new report current.

12222

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

<a'6.&o*n

(+a.es

Die= Sta9e 1ep rt
.isplays design references and appropriate information for this report type.

6ac9$r !nd I/a$e'
The Image 9ist dialog displays a list of available images for the bac5ground. Add *pens the Add Image dialog to browse the directories on the controller to add a file to the list. .elete .eletes the currently selected file from the list. *6 *pens the selected file. If the file does not e ist or there is an error, a warning message is displayed, and the Image 9ist dialog will appear again so you can select another file. !ancel $ its out of the dialog without changes. *nly one #eoTiff file can be selected at a time. "ore file types will be added later. To use a file once it is added, ma5e sure the file is chec5ed in the list. If no file is selected, then no bac5ground image will appear in the map.

Pr pertie'
This dialog displays the Properties of the selected file. %ile Name The imageYs file name without e tension. %ile Path The imageYs location on the device or P!. %ile Type
P/N 7010-0492

12323

E itin. 3ob 9ata

Specifies the file type of the image. 2nits Allows you to select the units in which the image file is scaled. 2se Borld %ile The 2se Borld %ile chec5 bo tells the user whether or not the image needs a Borld %ile to be plotted properly.

1 ad' F lder
!lic5 the icon to open the $dit Roads folder.
Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9:

Roads $dits properties of e isting roads and create new roads. )ori?ontal $dits an available hori?ontal alignment and create a new one. Certical $dits an available vertical alignment and create a new one. Templates $dits properties of an e isting 'section template and create a new one. A'Sections $dits available 'sections and create a new one. String Set $dits an e isting set of strings and create a new set.

12424

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

7oa s

1 ad'
The Roads dialog displays a list of the created roads, and plots of the hori?ontal and vertical alignments of the selected Road. %&& Select the Add Road dialog to create a new Road. E&it *pens the $dit Road dialog, displaying the parameters of the selected road. ,elete .eletes the selected road from the @ob.

AddAEdit 1 ad'
In this dialog you can edit the properties of a Road Alignment. The dialog consists of two separate tabs with Alignment properties. The properties are the following= %lignment ta! "ame The name of the Road Alignment. 9ayer A combo bo where you can select the layer in which this road should be placed. The associated button brings up the layer properties dialog. 01 %lnt In this combo bo youYll find all available )ori?ontal Alignments. Select one for your Road. The associated button brings up the )ori?ontal Alignment list where you can add, edit and delete )ori?ontal Alignments. 7t %lnt In this combo bo youYll find all available Certical Alignments. Select one for your Road. The associated button brings up the Certical
P/N 7010-0492

12020

E itin. 3ob 9ata

Alignment list where you can add, edit and delete Certical Alignments. Start Station>Stn>Chainage )ere you can enter the Start Station of the Road. Start Station is the start position along the Road Alignment. Station>Stn Inter+al This is the interval at which the ne t station position will be decided. Negative values can be entered, which will cause the advancement to be a decreasing instead of an increasing along the line. Sur$ace ta! A/Sect Set > String Set This button can toggle between A'Sect Set and String Set. Toggling between the two will change the contents of the combo bo and the button. If you wish to associate your Road with a !ross Section or a String Set, please select one here. =or3ing Corri&or: 9e$t $nter the left side wor5ing corridor here. The left side must be lower or eOual to the right corridor. =or3ing Corri&or: -ight $nter the right side wor5ing corridor here.

Start P int
The Start Pt tab displays the parameters of the road starting point. Point The point name can be entered manually ;if a new point name is entered, the point will be created with the coordinates entered in the North, $ast and )eight fields< or chosen from the map or from the list. Co&e The point code and attributes can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list for a new point.

12121

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

7oa s

"orth, East, 0eight The local coordinates of the point. Start Sta>Start Chain The starting station or the starting chain distance. Sta Inter+al The interval between the points where the road related computations are made.

Dertical Ali$n/ent
The Cert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements, or long sections ;for the 9ong Section vertical alignment type<, the vertical alignment plot, and the starting station ;or chainage< at each element. In the case of the $lement vertical alignment type, the element list has the following columns= Element" the icon and the name of the element= vertical grade or parabola. /en%t." the length of the elementM Start Grade2 End Grade" the grades of the element, in percentage, at the starting and ending points. %or a Certical grade element this values are the same. In the case of the 9ong Sections vertical alignment type, the element list has the following columns= /on% Section" the name of the element. Station" the station distance. Elevation" the elevation value on the station. *C /en%t." the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near the station, where the alignment has a parabolic shape. %&& .isplays a floating menu from which to select an element or the 9ong Section dialog for adding a vertical element after the last element. Insert .isplays a floating menu from which to select elements or the 9ong Section dialog for insertion at the selected location in the list.

P/N 7010-0492

12727

Station The station distance from the beginning of the road. d Elements" select $lements to create the virtical curve using either Certical #rades or Parabolas. 12525 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . . 7C length Available when the !urve Type is Parabola. and the interval around the station where the vertical alignment line has a parabolic shape. The vertical alignment is presented as a set of sections between the stations where the heights are 5nown . The length of the vertical curve at the station. "ame $nter a name for the Road 7%9 Type There are two ways of the creating vertical elements for the roads.It is assumed that the station is located in the middle of the interval.usually these are the e tremums of the vertical alignment line<. 0eight>Ele+ation The height at the station. 3ob 9ata AddAEdit 1 ad The first Road dialog is used to set the name of the road and select the CA9 .< %rc -a&ius Available when the !urve Type is !ircular Arc. d /on% Section" select 9ong Section to create the road by sections. 4 n$ Secti n The 9ong Section dialog contains parameters of the section. $nter the radius of the Arc. Cur+e Type Select if the curve is either a Parabola or !ircular Arc.E itin.vertical alignment< type of the created road.

.isplays a floating menu from which to select elements for adding after the last element. the hori?ontal alignment plot and the starting station . E&it *pens a dialog with properties of the selected element." the length of the elementM d A1imut.7oa s H riB ntal Ali$n/ent The )? tab shows the list of hori?ontal alignment elements.< d A7" Spiral constant &= 9ength of Tangent'Spiral to Spiral'!urve. spiral or intersection point . spiral. The element list has the following columns= d Element" the icon and the name of the element= line. %&& . curve." the a?imuth at the beginning of the elementM d -adius" the radius of the curve.or chainage< of each element.eletes the element from the road. or intersection pointM d /en%t.the radius of the spiral is the radius at the end of the YincomingY spiral or at the beginning of the Ye itingY spiralM the radius of the intersection point is the radius of the corresponding curve.elete . d A<" Spiral constant (= 9ength of !urve'Spiral to Spiral'Tangent. P/N 7010-0492 12929 . The spiral constant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral. The spiral constant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral. Insert .isplays a floating menu from which to select elements for insertion at the selected location in the list.

a section of a line connecting center of the arc with verte of the angle<. since road elements are usually tan$ential to each other. This field is editable only for the starting element of the road. 3ob 9ata 4ine To add a line. or one of four parameters unambiguously defining the curve length= chord. C!r8e To add a curve. the chec5 mar5 from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog should be removed. press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the !urve item from the floating menu.eg Cur+e The radius of the curve. middle ordinate . delta . 9ength>Chor&>Tangent>)i& 5r&>. NOTICE NOTICE Caution should &e e'ercised #hen settin$ the a. the a?imuth is set tangent to the previous element. The !urve dialog will open. %1imuth 0y default. 9ength The length of the line element.the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of the corresponding curve<. -a&ius> .the angle between the radii corresponding to the curve< or e ternal .elta>E ternal The length of the curve element. To change the a?imuth of all other elements. tangent. or one of the two parameters unambiguously defining the radius= degree of chord. The plot at the bottom'left corner will show the elementYs appearance. press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the 9ine item from the floating menu.E itin. or degree of curve. The plot in the bottom'left corner will show the elementYs appearance. 13030 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .eg Chor&> . The 9ine dialog will open.imuth.

. -a&ius> . Turn The direction of turn.eg Chor&> . or degree of curve 9ength> Sp Const $nter either the 9ength or Sp !onst . %1imuth 0y default. The Spiral dialog will open. the 9eft value for countercloc5wise direction.Spiral !onstant< for the Spiral.eg Cur+e The radius of the curve. the a?imuth is set tangent to the previous element.%1imuth 0y default. Turn The direction of turn. This field is editable only for the starting element of the road. The Spiral !onstant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral. The Right value stands for cloc5wise direction.ir . This field is editable only for the starting element of the road. the chec5 mar5 from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog should be removed. press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Spiral item from the floating menu. the 9eft value for countercloc5wise direction. The Right value stands for cloc5wise direction. To change the a?imuth of all other elements. Spiral To add a spiral. the chec5 mar5 from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog should be removed. To change the a?imuth of all other elements. or one of two parameters unambiguously defining the radius= degree of chord. the a?imuth is set tangent to the previous element.

TS.entering the turn<.circle'spiral< to ST. East The plane coordinates of the intersection pointM cannot be changed for an e isting point. or one of two parameters unambiguously defining the radius= degree of chord. Dertical Ali$n/ent The Cert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements. the element list has the following columns= d Element" the icon and the name of the element= vertical grade or parabola.spiral' traverse< . or !S. The Spiral !onstant is the sOuare root of the product of the length and the radius of the spiral.traverse'spiral< to S!. Point The name of the intersection point or select it from the map or the list. the vertical alignment plot. press the Insert or Add buttons in the )? tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Intersection Point item from the floating menu.Spiral !onstant< for the Spiral." the length of the elementM . $ither enter the name manually or the North and $ast coordinates. or degree of curve 9ength1> Sp Const1. and the starting station . In the case of the $lement vertical alignment type. or long sections .The direction of movement along the spiral. d /en%t. Inter'ecti n P int To add an intersection point.spiral'circle< . -a&ius> . "orth.e iting the turn<.eg Cur+e The radius of the curve.for the 9ong Section vertical alignment type<.eg Chor&> .or chainage< at each element. 9ength2> Sp Const2 $nter either the 9ength or Sp !onst .

d Station" the station distance. If the grade is falling. Cur+e Type Select if the curve is either a Parabola or !ircular Arc.isplays a floating menu from which to select an element or the 9ong Section dialog for adding a vertical element after the last element. .d Start Grade2 End Grade" the grades of the element. Insert . where the alignment has a parabolic shape. C!r8e To add a curve. press the Insert or Add buttons in the Cert tab of the Add Road dialog and select the !urve item from the floating menu. press the Insert or Add buttons in the Cert tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Certical #rade item from the floating menu. 9ength The length of the vertical grade element.isplays a floating menu from which to select elements or the 9ong Section dialog for insertion at the selected location in the list. . in percentage. %&& .ra&e The grade of the element. d Elevation" the elevation value on the station. In the case of the 9ong Sections vertical alignment type. at the starting and ending points. in percents. %or a Certical grade element this values are the same. Dertical Grade To add a vertical grade. the element list has the following columns= d /on% Section" the name of the element. the value should be set negative. d *C /en%t." the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near the station.

eletes the station from the list. %rc -a&ius Available when the curve type is !ircular Arc.elete . The list of templates contains the following columns= d Station" The station where the template is applied.t B Section" The names of the templates for the left and right parts of the road relative to the center line. The radius of the element. where cross section templates are applied. . in percents. . %&& *pens a blan5 A'Section dialog. If the grade is falling. The length of the parabola element. The left and right cross sections can be different.ra&e. C"Secti n The A'Section tab contains a list of stations. d /e!t B Section2 -i%.ra&e The starting and ending grades of the element.9ength Available when the curve type is Parabola. the value should be set negative. NOTICE NOTICE If t#o or more templates are defined. the intermediate cross sections are calculated usin$ interpolation. Start . E&it *pens the A'Section dialog with properties of the selected cross section. En& . It also displays a general view of the cross section.

C"Secti n
The A'section dialog contains the parameters of the cross section. Station The station distance. 9e$t A/Section, -ight A/Section The cross section templates for the left and right parts of the road. These can be chosen only from the e isting cross section templates.

Calc!late 1 ad P int'
The !alculate Road Points dialog allows the user to generate points along, to the right and to the left of the center line of the road, along its entire length. Points to .enerate .efines the points to generate ' center line points, the points to the right of the center line, and>or the points to the left of the center line. Also, if it is desired to include the transition points, place the chec5 mar5 in the corresponding field and select a prefi >suffi for them, if necessary, in the appearing field below. Station Inter+al Sets the interval between the generated points. 0y default it is the Station Interval set in the Start Pt tab in the Roads dialog. "e t *pens the !9 Points Params dialog.

Centerline P int Para/'
The !9 Points Params dialog displays the parameters of points to be computed along the center line. First Point The name of the first point. Co&e

The code and attributes of the points being generatedM entered manually or chosen $rom the &rop/&o'n list. Pre$i >Su$$i Bhen chosen, sets the prefi or suffi to be added to the generated point name. Sa+e points to Point 9ist !hec5 if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list. Bhen chec5ed, a field appears where the name for the list can be set.

1i$htA4eft Off'et P int' Para/'
.isplays the parameters of points to be computed to the right or left of the center line. First Point The name of the first point. Co&e The code and attributes of the points being generatedM entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Pre$i >Su$$i Bhen chosen, sets the prefi or suffi to be added to the generated point name. Sa+e points to Point 9ist !hec5 if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate points list. Bhen chec5ed, a field appears where the name for the list can be set. 5$$sets Set the offset of the point from the center line along two dimensions= hori?ontal ;the Right field< and vertical ;the 2p>.own field< relative to the surface ;Surface *ffset type< or to the hori?ontal line ;%lat *ffset type<.

"o&i=ontal ali.n+ents

H riB ntal ali$n/ent'
The hori?ontal alignments dialog contains three basic parts= The alignment list A list with all available hori?ontal alignments. The alignment pre+ie' A preview window displaying the currently selected hori?ontal alignment The e&it !uttons ,elete Select the alignment or alignment that you wish to delete, and then press this button. IouYll be as5ed for confirmation. E&it $dit a currently selected alignment. %&& Add an entirely new alignment.

Dertical ali$n/ent'
The vertical alignments dialog contains three basic parts= The alignment list A list with all available vertical alignments. The alignment pre+ie' A preview window displaying the currently selected vertical alignment The e&it !uttons ,elete Select the alignment or alignment that you wish to delete, and then press this button. IouYll be as5ed for confirmation. E&it

E itin. 3ob 9ata

$dit a currently selected alignment. %&& Add an entirely new alignment.

Hi$hA4 = P 'iti n'
This dialog will display any e tremums found along a vertical alignment. The types of e tremums found are the high or low positions of arcs, curves and the transition points between two straight lines. The dialog consists of three parts= d Alnt Name" The name of the vertical alignment. d /ist" A list with high>low positions data. d T.e MAGNET Field menu" FSave to %ileF. The )igh>9ow Positions list contain the following data= Station 4(nit6 The station along the vertical alignment. Type F)ighF or F9owF position. Ell ht>Ele+ation 4(nit6 $llipsodial height or $levation, depending on the coordinate system used. -a&ius 4(nit6 Radius of an arc with an high>low e tremum.

Save to File will save the current listing to a file with a standard file name= F0i%./ow#ositions't4tF. The file name is selectable by the user.

>-)e'tion Te+#lates

C"Secti n Te/plate'
The A'Sect Templates dialog displays a list of the e isting templates in the upper part of the dialog and a plot of the highlighted template in the lower part. The list contains three columns= d Name ;the name of the template<, d !ut Slope and d %ill Slope values. %&& *pens the blan5 A'Sect Templates dialog. E&it *pens the properties of the selected template. ,elete .eletes the template from the list.

C"Sect Te/plate
The A'Sect Template dialog contains parameters for the template. "ame The name of the template. Slope The !ut and %ill parameter values ;Run values for cut and fill for a unit rise<. These values represent the hori?ontal increment of the slope for a unit vertical increment. The !ut slope is used when the road surface is below the terrain, and the %ill Slope is used when the road surface is above the terrain. Also the dialog contains a list of segments comprising the template and a plot of the template. A list of segments consists of three columns= !ode ;the code of the segment<, )? ;the hori?ontal offset<, Cert ;the vertical offset<. %&&

E itin. 3ob 9ata

*pens the blan5 Segment dialog. The added segment will be attached after the last segment in the list. Insert *pens the blan5 Segment dialog. The added segment is inserted in the list above the currently highlighted segment. E&it *pens the Segment dialog with the parameters of the highlighted segment. ,elete .eletes the segment from the template.

Se$/ent
The Segment dialog contains the parameters of the segment. Segment Point The name of the segment point. 5$$set The hori?ontal and vertical offsets. Press the .own>2p>#rade button to select the type and value of the vertical offset. 0eing input as #rade ;in T<, the vertical offset will be recalculated to meters ;or other selected units< after the *6 button is pressed.

C"Secti n Set
This dialog contains a list with all available cross section sets. There dialog consists of five separate parts= 9ist $ach available cross section set is listed here by their name. The cross sections are sorted by their add date. Pre+ie' The selected cross section will be previewed on the dialog. ,elete

14040

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

)t&in. )et

The delete button is used for deleting one or more cross sections. If the cross section being deleted contains references to cross section templates ' these will also be removed if the user wishes to do so. E&it Select one cross section for editing. %&& Add a new cross section.

Strin$ Set
The String Set dialog lists the currently available String Sets. It consists of a list, a preview window and three buttons= String Set list The list containing all available String Sets. Pre+ie' 'in&o' .isplays the currently selected String Set. ,elete %or deleting one or more String Sets. "ultiple String Sets can be deleted at the same time. E&it %or editing a single String Set. %&& %or adding a single String Set.

AddAEdit Strin$ Set
This dialog is displayed when adding a new String Set or editing an e isting one. The dialog is separated into four destinct parts= String Set

P/N 7010-0492

14141

This dialog is separated into three parts= 01 %lnt an& 7t %lnt Select the hori?ontal and vertical alignment you want the Alignment Pair to consist of. It is possible to change the order of the Strings by using the arrow buttons located on the left side of the Strings list. Select From /ine !reate an alignment pair from a 9ine. Pre+ie' 'in&o' This window will display the currently selected String. The first one is Delete. The third one is Add for adding a new String to the current String Set. which will delete all the selected Strings.E itin."ET Fiel& menu 01 Alnt 14242 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . E&it !uttons There are three buttons available for manipulating the Strings within the String Set. From Map Select a 9ine from a "ap and create the Alignment Pair from it. It can be hidden with the arrow button in the right bottom corner. String Sets list This list contains all the Strings that the String Set consists of. )%.double clic5 on the String will also edit it<. If youYre editing a current String Set is is possble to change the name of the String Set by changing the name in the input bo . AddAEdit 1 ad Strin$ Ali$n/ent Pair Add or $dit a Road String Alignment Pair. 3ob 9ata The name of the current String Set. The second one is Edit which will edit the currently selected String .

edit or delete hori?ontal alignments. )et . P/N 7010-0492 14343 .isplays the vertical alignment dialog where you can add. *t Alnt .)t&in.isplays the hori?ontal alignment dialog where you can add. edit or delete vertical alignments.

3ob 9ata Notes2 14444 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .E itin.

C-a#te& 7 Cal'*late Calc!late F lder Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: Inverse The four inverse tas5s available in the Inverse menu are based on computing the a?imuth and distance between two points. and the result is shown. P/N 7010-0492 7-1 . Point in . and angle and distance offsets from the 5nown point. using a 5nown point. and either the direction or distance from the 5nown point.irection !alculates the coordinates of a point. press eOuals. !alculator . given their coordinates. Iou type in the entire eOuation you want to calculate.oes calculations and conversion. !urves !omputes a full set of parameters to determine a curve using four various minimum sets of specified parameters. Intersection !omputes the intersection point or points given two 5nown points.

T"DP-7Ms. or the coordinates of a point>points which form a polygon of the desired area. and vertical offsets along a direction which is defined by an a?imuth. . . left or deflection angles. Transform and Traverse Ad@ustment.T". or right. which have a common mid point. a start line and an end line.a?imuth and distance< between two 5nown points. based on hori?ontal.Cal'*late Area !alculates the area of a polygon formed by any points. after being added to the point list>linewor5>area. a curve. or a road. Traverse !alculates traverse and sideshot points.T" !alculates data between two . Scale. Ad@ust Transforms points and includes five tas5s= Rotate. !orner Angle !alculates the angle between two lines. for a new . and along contour lines. Calc!late In8er'e Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: Point To Point !omputes the inverse . (. *ffsets !alculates the coordinates of points along a line. Translate.

Point to 9ist !omputes the inverse . To Select the ending point. !alc !alculates the inverse. The In+erse Page contains the data needed for the tas5= %rom Select the starting point. &East is the increment of the $ast coordinate. Point to !urve !alculates the station of the 5nown point inverse to the 5nown curve. T= P int In8er'e The Two'Point Inverse tas5 computes the inverse .a?imuth and distance< for all the points in a Points list with respect to a 5nown point.ist is the vertical distance from one point to another. &0eight is the increment of the height. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= %1imuth to the second point from the first point. &"orth is the increment of the North coordinate. .a?imuth and distance< between two 5nown points.ist is the hori?ontal distance from one point to another.ob Points. 7. selected from the map or from the list of .Cal'*late Fol e& Point to 9ine !omputes the station of a 5nown point inverse to a 5nown line. The F'F sign means that the height of the second point is lower than the height of the first point. 0. These points can be entered manually.

Start Stn Set the starting station of the reference line. Store PT9 Point If %1 to Pt is selected.ob Points. Start Point is the name of the starting point of the line. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= From Point is the name of the 5nown point. It can be entered manually. !ode . %1imuth is the a?imuth of the 5nown line. In8er'e P int t 4ine The Inverse Point to 9ine !*#* tas5 computes the station of a 5nown point inverse to a 5nown line.ra&e4Slope6 ' the increment of the height in percent. A?imuth>A? to Pt Set the a?imuth of the reference line manually. !alc Press to calculate the inverse. chec5 if the 5nown point is to be stored as a PT9 point. and the a?imuth from the 5nown point to this point will indicate the direction. Start Point Select the starting point of the reference line. Slope &istance ' the computed distance between the two points.Cal'*late .isplays the code of the 5nown point and cannot be changed here. Start Station is the starting station of the line. . selected from the map or from the list of . The In+erse Point to 9ine page contains the data needed to calculate the offsets of the point with respect to the line= Point Select the 5nown point name. select another point. %or A? to Pt.

PT Point. Calues of Small or 9arge can be selected from the Cur+e drop'down bo to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations. Iou can manually enter. PC Point. select from the list or from the map the following two sets of points= PC Point. It can be entered manually. PT Point. . 0eight is the vertical offset between the 5nown point and the Station point.9arge curve<. Cur+e Point. Point Select the 5nown point name. !alc Press to calculate the curve parameters. or -P Point.ob Points. !urve The In+erse Point to Cur+e page contains the data needed to calculate the offsets of the point with respect to the curve= The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first curve point chosen. 5$$set is the hori?ontal offset between the 5nown point and the Station point.Small curve< and the other with delta greater than or eOual &48 degrees .Cal'*late Fol e& Station indicates the distance between the starting point and the pro@ection of the 5nown point on the reference line.or from the list of . Start Stn Set the starting station of the reference curve. In8er'e P int t C!r8e The Inverse Point to !urve !*#* tas5 computes the station of a 5nown point inverse to a 5nown curve. In the second case. The radius and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual &48 degrees . the distance between -P Point and PC point should be eOual to distance between -P Point and PT point. selected from the map .

5$$set is the hori?ontal offset between the 5nown point and the Station point. The -esults Page shows the following results of the calculation for every point in the point list= . selected from the list of @ob Point 9ists. selected from the map or the list of .a?imuth and distance< for all the points in a Points list with respect to a 5nown point. The In+erse Pt to Pt 9ist Page contains the data needed for the tas5. The name can be entered manually. This can be entered manually. Point 9ist Select the point list.isplays the list of points in the selected point list along with their codes.ob Points. !alc Press to calculate the inverse. In8er'e P int t P int 4i't The Inverse point to point list !*#* tas5 computes the inverse . 9ist of Points .Cal'*late The -esults page shows the initial data and the results of the calculation= Tangent %1imuth is the a?imuth of the tangent at the point of intersection of the curve and the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. &0eight is the vertical offset between the 5nown point and the Station point. Sta indicates the distance between the starting station and the point of intersection of the curve and the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. the list of points in the selected point list and a window for the plot of the point list= Point Select the 5nown point.

ist is the hori?ontal distance from one point to another.ob Points or from the map. #rd>#nd Set the grid or ground distance offset along the angle offset line.Cal'*late Fol e& %1imuth to the point in the point list from the 5nown point. !ode . P int in 2irecti n The Point in . the a?imuth. ). selected from the list of . &0eight is the increment of the height. !ogo Pt Set the name of the computed point. It can be entered manually. Slope &istance ' the computed distance between the two 5nown points and the point in the list. 0.ist Set the height offset. %rom Point Set the starting point.irection !*#* tas5 calculates the coordinates of a point. The F'F sign means that the height of the point in the list is lower than the height of the 5nown point. Angle *ffset Set the angle offset from the a?imuth line. 7. A?imuth>A? to Pt Set the a?imuth either by value or as a direction to another 5nown point. &"orth is the increment of the North coordinate. Cert . using a 5nown point. . &East is the increment of the $ast coordinate. To alternate between grid or ground press the button.ist is the vertical distance from one point to another.ra&e4Slope6 ' the increment of the height in percent. the angle offset from the a?imuth line and the distance offsets from the 5nown Point.

given one length and one radius parameter. the radius.Cal'*late Set the code of the computed point.istance is the vertical distance between the two points.PT point<. %1imuth from the 5nown point to the un5nown point. -Pt !urve !omputes the curve parameters given three points= starting point of the curve .P! point<. any curve point and ending point of the curve . the Radius point. PI D Tangents !omputes the starting. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved. East is the easting coordinate of the point. . ending and center points of a curve.istance is the hori?ontal distance between the two points. 01 . given the point of intersection. Ell 0t is the height of the point. !alc Press to calculate the coordinates of the un5nown point. The -esults Page shows the following results of the calculation. 7ert . and P! and PT points. The coordinates are displayed for both the computed points= "orth is the northing coordinate of the point. and the a?imuths from the PI point to the P! and PT points respectively. Calc!late C!r8e' Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: !urve !alculates the full set of curve parameters.

9ength of the curve.along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<. C!r8e S l!ti n The !urve Solution !*#* tas5 calculates the full set of curve parameters given. .tangent points< of the curve. one length and one radius parameter. The Cur+e Solution page contains the data needed for the tas5 and a window for the plot of the curve= Radius>.Cal'*late Fol e& Radius D Pts !omputes the parameters and the coordinates of the center of a curve given the starting and ending points of the curve and a radius parameter. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points. E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve . .eg !hord>. 9ength>!hord>Tangent>"id *rd Select the length parameter of the curve. Turn Select the direction of turn relative to the starting point.eg !urve Select the curvature parameter. .elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of curve whose chord is &88 units long. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= -a&ius of the curve.egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a length of &88 units. and the ending point. . Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points . !alc Press to calculate the parameters of the curve.

Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.P!< and ending .PI<.PT< points. PI E Tan$ent' The PI and Tangents !*#* tas5 computes the starting . and the a?imuths from the PI point to the P!. and PT points. PT Point Set the name and the code for the caculated ending curve point. It can be manually entered. RP Point Set the name and the code for the calculated radius point.Cal'*late )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. A? PI to PT Set the a?imuth from the PI point to the ending curve point. and the center . respectively. given the Point of Intersection .eg !hord>Tangent Set the appropriate radius parameter of the curve. the radius. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc. 71010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Radius>. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.ob Points. The PI B Tangents page contains the data needed for the tas5= PI Point Set the Point of Intersection. chosen from the map or from the list of . P! Point Set the name and the code for the calculated starting curve point.Radius Point< of a !urve.eg !urve>. A? PI to P! Set the a?imuth from the PI point to the starting curve point.

egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is &88 units long. )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. . .elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.tangent points< of the curve.P! point<. E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve . Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points .Cal'*late Fol e& !alc Press to calculate the parameters of the curve and the coordinates of the P!. Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine. Three Pt C!r8e The Three Pt !urve !*#* tas5 computes the curve parameters given three points= starting point of the curve . Save Saves the results of the calculation. East is the easting coordinate of the P!>PT>RP point. Ell 0t is the height of the P!>PT>RP point.egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of a curve with a length of &88 units. any curve point P/N 7010-0492 71111 . *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved. .along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<. -a&ius of the curve. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the P!>PT>RP point. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc. PT and RP points. and the ending point. 9ength of the curve. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.

PT point<. Ell 0t is the height of the RP point. Iou can manually enter. In the second case the distance between -P Point and PC point should be eOual to distance between -P Point and PT point. -a&ius of the curve. or -P Point.9arge curve<. Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points. The Three Points Cur+e page displays the initial data for the tas5 The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first point chosen. P! and PT points. The -esults page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the RP point. The radius. PC Point.elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points. select from the list or from the map the following sets of points= PC Point. East is the easting coordinate of the RP point.Small curve< and the other with delta greater than or eOual to &48 degrees . The name and the code for this calculated point can be set. . PT Point. Cur+e Point. . . and the ending point.egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is &88 units long.tangent points< of the curve.egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a length of &88 units. Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points . !alc Press to calculate the curve parameters. In the first case the coordinates for the -P Point will be calculated along with the curve parameters. Calues of Small or 9arge can be selected from the Cur+e drop'down bo to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations. 71212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . or the Radius point and. PT Point.Cal'*late and ending point of the curve . and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual to &48 degrees . 9ength of the curve.

PT Point Set the Point of Tangency. Radius>.PT point< of the curve. It can be manually entered. 1adi!' E P int' The Radius D Points !*#* tas5 computes the parameters. selected from the map or from the list of . relative to the P! Point.Cal'*late Fol e& E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve . and a radius parameter. )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. The -a&ius B Point page contains the initial data for the tas5= P! Point Set the Point of !urvature. It can be manually entered.eg !urve>.eg !hord Set the radius parameter of the curve.ob points. Turn Set the direction of turn. Save Saves the results of the calculation. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved.ob points. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off.P! point< and ending points .RP point< given the starting . Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc. !urve P/N 7010-0492 71313 . and the coordinates of the center of a curve . selected from the map or from the list of . Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine.along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<.

Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the tangents at the starting and ending points. )i& 5r& is the length of the line segment between the curve and the chord on the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point. Ell 0t is the height of the RP point. 9ength of the curve.along the line @oining the point of intersection to the radius point<. !alc Press to calculate the curve parameters and the coordinates of the RP point. The radius. .egree Chor& defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve whose chord is &88 units long. E ternal is the shortest distance beween the point of intersection and the curve . 71414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . RP Point $nter the name.egree Cur+e defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute the radius of the curve with a length of &88 units. and the ending point.Cal'*late Set the curve in the circle that should be considered. and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual to &48 degrees . .Small curve<. Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at the end points of the arc. and attributes of the computed radius point. Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc that it cuts off. code.9arge curve<. Chor& is the distance between the starting and ending points . Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc they determine. East is the easting coordinate of the RP point. . The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the RP point.tangent points< of the curve. and the other with delta greater than or eOual to &48 degrees . -a&ius of the curve.elta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.

The Intersection Page contains the initial data for the Intersection tas5. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved. or map. A?imuth>. and the a?imuth from point ( to this point will indicate the direction.istance>A? to Pt Select the parameter that will be entered for the first point. This can be manually entered.istance>A? to Pt Select the parameter that will be entered for the first point. The te t indicates what the value will be interpreted as. selected from the @ob list.ob list. A?imuth>. !alc Starts the calculation process. or map. Point & Select the first point. P/N 7010-0492 71010 . This can be done by clic5ing this button. select another point.Cal'*late Fol e& Save Saves the results of the calculation. This can be manually entered. selected from the . Inter'ecti n Intersection dialog can be used to compute the intersection point or points given two 5nown points and either the direction or distance from the 5nown point. The te t indicates what the value will be interpreted as. Point ( Select the second point. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation. and the a?imuth from point & to this point will indicate the direction. !*#* Point Select the name and !ode for the result of the calculation. %or A? to Pt. select another point. This can be done by clic5ing this button. %or A? to Pt.

East= the $ast local coordinate of the first>second found point. press eOuals. Calc!lat r The calculator is a powerful tool to do all sorts of calculations and conversions. sin %unction that calculates the sine. Save Saves the results of the calculation. It is very easy to use. cos %unction that calculates the cosine. Ell ht= the height of the first>second found point. tan %unction that calculates the tangent. Input %ield This field is where calculations are done. This field is also used as the or r values for rectangular>polar conversions. 71111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .Cal'*late "orth= the North local coordinate of the first>second found point. This field is also used as the y or theta values for rectangular>polar conversions. Previous Result %ield *nce eOuals is pressed the previous result is moved up to this field. and the result is shown. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved. It will accept an entire calculation. Result %ield *nce eOuals is pressed the result is calculated and presented here. Type in the entire eOuation you want to calculate. and then once eOuals is pressed it will calculate everything at once.

ln %unction that calculates the natural logorithmic value or base e. sOuare root %unction that calculates the sOuare root of a value. arccos %unction that calculates the arccosine. "! !lears the memory. percent !onverts the value to a percent or >&88. ": P/N 7010-0492 X 71717 . "S Saves the already computed result into memory.Cal'*lato& arcsin %unction that calculates the arcsine. inverse %unction that calculates the inverse of a value or &> . arctan %unction that calculates the arctangent. "R Recalls the memory value indicated by " in the input field. log %unction that calculates the logarithmic value base &8. sOuared %unction that calculates the sOuare of a value. nth power %unction that calculates the nth power of a value in the format power.

#rad . This is done by using both result fields.Cal'*late Adds the already computed result to the value in memory.eg %unction that converts radians to degrees.eg ."S . . Rad . . $nter the values and clic5 Pol Rec and it will convert the top value to and bottom to y."S . the top one being r. bottom one being theta. ."S form. $nter the values and clic5 Rec Pol and it will convert the top value to r and bottom to theta. base of the natural logarithm. 71515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ."S' Subtract the right value from the left assuming both are in ."S: Adds the left and right values assuming both are in . . . . y<.eg #rad %unction that converts degrees to gradians.r theta< to rectangular .eg %unction that converts gradians to degrees.eg Rad %unction that converts degrees to radians. bottom one being y."S form.eg %unction that converts degrees minutes seconds notation to degrees.r theta<."S %unction that converts degrees to degrees minutes seconds notation. This is done by using both result fields. the top one being . .eg %unction that converts polar coordiantes . y< to polar . e The constant e. Rec Pol %unction that converts rectangular coordiantes .

. Type in the entire eOuation you want to calculate. ! !lears out all the fields. copy If the calculator was started from an edit field. std 0rings up the standard calculator. it means the calculator is wor5ing in radians. it copies the value bac5 to that field. it means the calculator is wor5ing in degrees. #rad If this is showing. It will accept an entire calculation and then once eOuals is pressed it will calculate everything at once. it means the calculator is wor5ing in gradians. It is very easy to use. press eOuals. removes the last entry. Calc!lat r The calculator is a powerful tool to do all sorts of calculations and conversions. Rad If this is showing. a' 0ac5space. and the result is shown. the circumference to diameter ratio for any circle.eg If this is showing. Input %ield This field is where calculations are done.Cal'*lato& pi The constant pi. :>' Alternates the value between positive and negative. Result %ield P/N 7010-0492 71919 .

": Adds the already computed result to the value in memory. "! !lears the memory. a' X 72020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . "R Recalls the memory value indicated by " in the input field. sOuared %unction that calculates the sOuare of a value. sOuare root %unction that calculates the sOuare root of a value. ! !lears out all the fields. percent !onverts the value to a percent or >&88. This field is also used as the or r values for rectangular>polar conversions. nth power %unction that calculates the nth power of a value in the format power. inverse %unction that calculates the inverse of a value or &> .Cal'*late *nce eOuals is pressed the result is calculated and presented here. This field is also used as the y or theta values for rectangular>polar conversions. "S Saves the already computed result into memory. Previous Result %ield *nce eOuals is pressed the previous result is moved up to this field.

C /p Area The !omp Area !*#* tas5 computes the area of a polygon with 5nown vertices. )inge !omputes the coordinates of a point. 9ine !omputes the coordinates of points. removes the last entry. Calc!late Area Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: 0y Points !omputes the area of a polygon with 5nown vertices. P/N 7010-0492 72121 . which along with two 5nown points form a Ouadrilateral of the 5nown area.Cal'*lato& 0ac5space. sci 0rings up the scientific calculator. copy If the calculator was started from an edit field. forms a polygon of 5nown area. it copies the value bac5 to that field. which when inserted between the starting and ending points of a pointlist. :>' Alternates the value between positive and negative.

!alc Press to calculate the area of the polygon. Point 9ist is the list of points constituting the polygon vertices in the correct order. and a window for the plot of the point list. 9ist of Points . The arrow buttons can be used to modify the order of the points to obtain the correct shape of the polygon.ob2nits<X( and in acres. selected from the list of . Ne t Press to proceed to the ne t page of the wi?ard. The %rea Pages are a wi?ard that contain the data needed for the tas5. 3n =n Area " Hin$e The 6nown Area )inge method computes the coordinates of a point. forms a polygon of the 5nown area.isplays the list of points in the selected point list along with their codes. the list of points in the selected point list.. 2se the arrow 5eys to change the order of the points in the list for this !*#* tas5. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= %rea of the polygon in . The second %rea page contains= 72222 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . This can be entered manually. which when inserted between the starting and ending points of a point list. The first %rea page contains= Point9ist Set the name of the point list.ob Point 9ists.Cal'*late The %rea page contains data needed for the tas5 and a window for the plot of the polygon= Point 9ist Select the name of the Point 9ist. 9ine'or3 or %rea that contains vertices of the polygon. The name can be entered manually or selected from the list.

. 0ac5 Press to go to the previous %rea page to modify the pointlist. East is the easting coordinate of the hinge point. where the hinge point is located. !alc Press to calculate the coordinates of the hinge point.ob2nits<X( or acres. which along with two 5nown points form a Ouadrilateral of 5nown area.. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s against them will be saved.Cal'*lato& A?imuth Set the 5nown a?imuth from the first point in the list. The %rea Page contains the data needed for the tas5= Start Pt P/N 7010-0492 72323 . !ogo Point Set the name of the calculated hinge point. 3n =n Area " 4ine The 6nown Area 9ine method computes the coordinates of points.ob2nits<X( or in acres. Area Set the area of the polygon in either . in . Ell 0t is the height of the hinge point. !ode Set the !ode and attributes for the calculated hinge point.i$$erence is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area. The -esults Page shows the results of the calculation= "orth is the northing coordinate of the hinge point.ob2nits<X( or acres.. Total %rea of the polygon in . Save Saves the results of the calculation. Plot %rea is the area enclosed by the points in the pointlists alone..

selected from the map or the list of . Area Set the 5nown area of the Ouadrilateral in either . selected from the map or the list of . A?( Set the a?imuth of the line emanating from the end point . It can be entered manually. If Parallel is set. code and attributes of the first calculated point. A?& Set the a?imuth of the line emanating from the start point . %rea of the Ouadrilateral in ..5 Pt 2 point.Cal'*late Set the name of the 5nown starting point. $nd Pt Set the name of the 5nown ending point.9ine &< to the calculated C5. !ogo Pt& Set the name.. 72424 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .9ine (< to the calculated C5.ob Points. code and attributes of the second calculated point. The -esults Page shows the following results of the calculation. The coordinates are displayed for both the computed points= "orth is the northing coordinate of one of the two points. !alc Press to calculate the coordinates of the two points.ob 2nits<X( or acres. It can be entered manually. East is the easting coordinate of one of the two points. !ogo Pt( Set the name.ob2nits<X( or acres. the line !*#* Pt &'Q!*#* Pt ( will be parallel to the line defined by the Start and $nd Points.ob Points.5 Pt 1 point. Ell 0t is the height of one of the two points. A?imuth>Parallel Set the a?imuth of the line that will intersect 9ine& at !*#* Pt & and 9ine( at !*#* Pt ( with an area of the Ouadrilateral eOual to the 5nown area.

i$$erence is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area.ob2nits<X( or acres. Calc!late Off'et' Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: 9ine *ffset . which have a common mid point. $ither enter manually or select from the map or from the list. P/N 7010-0492 72020 . Save Saves the results of the calculation.. a start line and an end line. $ither enter manually or select from the map or from the list. in .efines a line between two points used for computing point locations relative to the line.Cal'*lato& Plot %rea is the area enclosed by the points in the pointlists alone. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved. $ither enter manually or select from the map or from the list. "id Point The point that defines the corner of the angle. $nd Point The point that defines the second side of the angle. !alc !alculates the corner angle. C rner An$le !alculates the angle between two lines. Start Point The point that defines the first side of the angle. .

t o! t.Start Station< The starting station . Start Point The starting point of the line.Cal'*late !urve *ffset . $nd Point>A?imuth The direction of the line. The line is defined by its a?imuth. 8nterpolate 0t" The height of the computed points will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line.esignates the number of subdivisions if it is desired to subdivide the line.efines a curve .ei%. )t !omp The type of height computations for the computed points.e startin% point. Num Subs . or the $nd point of the line. It can be= 0t o! Start #t +. It can be set through the a?imuth of the line or the ending point of the line. a?imuth to another point. Road *ffset !omputes point locations relative to the selected road or alignment.indicates that you want to compute four points by subdividing the line in three eOual segments. 4ine E Off'et The !*#* 9ine D *ffset dialog allows you to define a line between two points used for computing point locations relative to the line. %or instance a value of . 72121 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Include Transition Points Bhether to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated station." The computed points will have the same height as the starting point of the line.chainage< of the line. SS .section of an arc< used for computing point locations in relation to the curve.

Radius> .elta Is the length parameter of the curve. P/N 7010-0492 72727 . Num Subs . )t !omp The type of height computations for the computed points.esignates the number of subdivisions if it is desired to subdivide the line.section of an arc< used for computing point locations in relation to the curve. the starting point of the arc.eg !urve> .e startin% point.ei%. P! Point The Point of !urve. PT Point The Point of Tangency. 9ength>!hord>Tangent>"id *rd>$ tern>. SS The starting station . Turn Indicates which side the center point of the curve is located. 8nterpolate 0t" The height of the computed points will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line. the ending point of the arc.Cal'*lato& C!r8e E Off'et' The !urve D *ffsets dialog function allows you to define a curve . %or instance a value of . !an be= 0t o! Start #t +. Include Transition Points Bhether to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated station.eg !hord The radius parameters of the curve.chainage< of the line.t o! t." The computed points will have the same height as the starting point of the line.indicates that you want to compute four points by subdividing the line in three eOual segments.

Station The starting or current station.own The 2p or .own )eight offset with respect to the height of the line at the station. Road>) Alnt>C Alnt The road or alignment to be used for computing points. !an be entered manually. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Station Interval shown in the ne t line. 2p>. Start Sta The starting point of the selected road of alignment. Stati n E Off'et' The !*#* Station D *ffsets dialog is used to define stationing which is used to compute the points location in relation to lines or curves. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Station Interval shown in the ne t line. Station $nd The desired end station if you wish to compute several points. Interval The station interval. the distance from the beginning. or chosen from the list. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line at the station shown on the Station field. 72525 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .Cal'*late 1 ad Off'et The !*#* Road *ffset dialog allows you to select a road or alignment used for computing point locations relative to their selection.

Traverse Performs traverse ad@ustments that apply corrections to the individual latitudes. (. Scale Scales the distances of a range of points relative to a 0ase Point. The name of the current or starting computed point. Calc!late Ad<!'t Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: Rotate Rotates the selected points around a specific point. Translate "oves a group of points. 1 tate The Rotate tas5 rotates the selected points around a specific point. Select points P/N 7010-0492 72929 .Cal'*lato& Point I. !ode The feature code used for the computed points. transformations using a list of point pairs to get the transformation parameters. departures. Transform Performs (. angles and>or elevations in order to ma5e them meet given conditions.

!alc Rotates the points.obs 9ist. )? . or by entering a Range using the 2y -ange button.. This can be by entering a Rotation Angle or by entering the *ld and New A?imuths..0t= all the selected points will be moved in the specified direction by a specified distance. This can be by !oords>Pts or A?. These points can be chosen from the map.To !rd<. These points can be chosen from the map. Translate 0y Select the method for translation. Select points Select the points for translation. from the . These parameters are set through the 0earing .A?imuth< field. The results can be seen through the $dit Points dialog.)t. Tran'late The Translate tas5 allows you to move a group of points. in the second case ' the local coordinates and the height of the location.ist.%rom !rd< and To Pt .ist. In the first case.ist fields. !alc Translates the points. 73030 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . set by the ne t two fields= %rom Pt . or by entering a Range using the 2y -ange button. Coor&s>Pts= all the selected points will be moved in the same direction and distance as between the points .locations<.obs 9ist. The results can be seen through the $dit Points dialog. define only the point I. from the .Cal'*late Select the points for rotation. Rotation Point Select the point which is to be the center of rotation. %1..ist and Cert . Rotation "ethod Select the rotation method.

The results can be seen through the $dit Points dialog. or by entering a Range using the 2y -ange button. These points can be chosen from the map.Cal'*lato& Scale The Scale tas5 allows you to scale the distances of a range of points relative to a 0ase Point. Transform Parameters page. !alc Scales the points. Ne t Select the Ne4t button to move to the (. Add Select the Add button to enter pairs of points > plane positions. from the . . Select points Select the points for scaling. 0ase Pt Sets the point that is the reference point for the scale transformation. $dit Select the Edit button to change an e isting point pair.obs 9ist. Scale %actor The scale factor of the coordinate transformation. Scale )eights !hec5 this field if the height values should also be scaled. Transform dialog contains a list of point pairs used for getting the transformation parameters. #2 Tran'f r/ The (. P/N 7010-0492 73131 .elete Select the Delete button to remove an e isting point pair.

is called tra+erse a&#ustment. $nd Point The station on which the traverse closes.(8. Ad<!'t/ent Cl 'e Sets the methods of traverse ad@ustment. Start Point The station on which the traverse originates. !urvature refraction If you need to consider $arth curvature and atmospheric refraction corrections. departures. The misclosures in latitudes. departures. Ad@ust Sideshots $nable this chec5 bo to include sideshots in ad@ustment. the traverse must assured to be mathematically consistent. Apply Angle 0alance $nable this chec5 bo to ad@ust angles in the traverse. Ad@ust $levations $nable this chec5 bo to include elevations ad@ustment if it is needed to determine elevations in the traverse.ob to store the results Set the name of the new @ob where the results of ad@usted traverse. set the value of curvature refraction to 8. !losing Angle 73232 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . . Apply !ompass Rule $nable this chec5 bo to ad@ust the traverse by the compass rule.&+ or 8. angles and>or elevations must be ad@usted out. angles and>or elevations in order to ma5e them meet given conditions.Cal'*late Tra8er'e Ad<!'t/ent 0efore the result of a tra+erse becomes applicable for determining to be located from the traverse stations. The process of applying corrections to the individual latitudes.

To Pt>To !rd P/N 7010-0492 73333 .9inear< P int Pair Inf The Point Pair In$o dialog selects the pairs of points or coordinates to obtain transformation parameters.9inear< Also.!hange< d Total difference of the sideshots . Ad<!'t/ent 1e'!lt' Results of ad@ustment contain the following information= d Ad@ustment methods d Names of the start and end points of traverse d Bhether an ad@ustment of elevations and ad@ustment of sideshots are made or not d !oefficient of refraction d Path to the new @ob with ad@usted traverse d Information about control points d *riginal coordinates of a traverse station d Ad@usted coordinates of a traverse station d .Cal'*lato& Shows the closing angle for the traverse ad@ustment.!hange< d Total difference for the traverse station . %rom Pt>%rom !rd !hanges the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be calculated. if the Ad@ust Sideshots option has been chosen= d *riginal coordinates of the sideshots d Ad@usted coordinates of the sideshots d .ifferences between original and ad@usted coordinates of the sideshots .ifferences between original and ad@usted coordinates of a traverse station .

Transform Parameters dialog displays the transformation parameters which will be applied to the set of points needing transformation. 0ac5 Returns to the <D Trans!orm dialog. 9ist Tap the button to select points to transform from a list. The Tra+erse Calc page displays the initial data for the traverse tas5= %rom Point Set the occupation point . left or deflection angles. based on hori?ontal.and Sideshot points. Tra8er'e Calc The Traverse !alc tas5 calculates Traverse. 9ayer Tap the button to transform all points from a layer selected in the /ayer dialog.eflection 73434 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . F%rom. It can be manually entered. chosen from the map or the list of .the traverse point<. ToF Tap the button to select points to transform from the By -an%e dialog..Cal'*late !hanges the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which the parameters will be calculated. #2 Tran'f r/ Para/eter' The (. and Certical *ffsets along a direction which is defined by an a?imuth or right. A?imuth>Angle Right>Angle 9eft>. !alc Performs the two dimentional transform and displays a successful message.ob points. "ap Tap the button to select points to transform from the map.

SideShot Press to compute the coordinates of the To Point. The a?imuth can be entered as is. and To Point is incremented to the ne t new Point in the database. based on the entered values for A?imuth>Angle Right>Angle 9eft>. In this case if an angle value is entered as Angle Right. The angle to the left is the angle at the 5nown point from the bac5sight point to the calculated point in an counter cloc5wise direction. Angle 9eft. If a 0S point has not been entered. 0S Point Press to display the 0S Point dialog that allows you to enter the 0ac5sight Point or 0ac5sight A?imuth.ist Set the Certical .eflection. computed from the right or left angles. )ori?ontal and Certical distances. The angle to the right is the angle at the 5nown point from the bac5sight point to the calculated point in a cloc5wise direction. ). #rd>#nd Set the grid or ground hori?ontal distance along the a?imuth line. To Point Set the name of the calculated point.istance along the a?imuth line. then an A?imuth is reOuired.Cal'*lato& Set the a?imuth from the 5nown point to the calculated point. this value will be considered as a?imuth. To alternate between grid or ground press the button. Cert . or deflection entered in this field and 0ac5sight information. Traverse P/N 7010-0492 73030 . or . The %rom Point does not change.eflection. The deflection is the angle at the 5nown point between the prolongation of the line from the bac5sight point and the line to the calculated point. !ode Set the code and attributes associated with the calculated point.

From Point of the tas5. and the To Point changes to the ne t new name in the database. based on the entered values for A?imuth>Angle Right>Angle 9eft>. )ori?ontal and Certical distances. East is the easting coordinate of the SideShot>Traverse point. To Point of the tas5. 7ert . selected from the map.eflection. 01 . The -esults page shows the results of the calculation of all the sideshots of traverse tas5s= "orth is the northing coordinate of the SideShot>Traverse point. Ell 0t is the height of the SideShot>Traverse point. *nly the points with chec5 mar5s ne t to them will be saved. 2earing from the %rom Point to the To Point. %1imuth from the %rom Point to the To Point. 6S P int The 0S Point dialog allows you to enter the bac5sight a?imuth for the Traverse tas5 of !*#*.Cal'*late Press to compute the coordinates of the To Point. Save Saves the results of the calculation.istance is the vertical distance between the %rom Point and the To Point. The bac5sight point may be entered manually. the code and string of the point are displayed.ob Points. or from the list of . !ode If a bac5sight point is entered.istance is the hori?ontal distance between the %rom Point and the To Point. The %rom Point changes to the To Point. 73131 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . The a?imuth can be computed from the Tra+erse From Point to a bac5sight point or can be entered manually. 0S Point>0S A?imuth> Set the bac5sight point location or the bac5sight a?imuth.

fill and area between two . select another e isting .Cal'*lato& Calc!late 2TM Clic9 an ic n t calc!late the ta'9: .T"s. The plane of pro@ection of the final .T" !reates a new .T" data along contour lines.T" Represents .T" will be defined as a flat plane at a fi ed elevation of ?ero.T".T" from the list. In the Final field. P/N 7010-0492 73737 . (. The plots will display both of the .T".T" on which you want the volume calculations to be performed. d If DTM is selected.T" selection changes an information message will display the ma imum and minimum Northing and $asting values for the area covered by the .T" from the list.T". $ither manually enter the name of an e isting . Bhen the . d If None is selected.T" in the edit field or press the 9ist selection button and choose the . !reate .T" selected.T" Columes !alculates the cut. !ontour . 2TM D l!/e' To perform volume calculations= &. $ither manually enter the name of the second .T". select the . the plot will display only the final .T" or press the 9ist selection button and choose the . select one of four options for volumes calculations. %rom the DTM drop'down menu.

T" is a three'dimensional display of transformed elevation data. 73535 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .T" describes the topographic surface with a networ5 of digiti?ed points and optional brea5lines. $ither manually enter the fi ed elevation in the edit field or press the "ap or the 9ist selection button to select a point in the @ob whose elevation will be used as the fi ed elevation. e isting point lists..T" calculation has been performed the Results tab will display the calculation data.T".. e isting linewor5. select the current method of selection of data reOuired to create the . e isting areas..T" or a plane of pro@ection. . the plane of pro@ection of the final . d By Code ' points of a selected code. After the point selection dialog has closed the edit field will display the elevation of the selected point.T"= d All ' all the @ob points.T" will be defined by three separate points. d If #lane is selected. Bhen a successful . in the Sel Pts drop'down list. In the Points>Point 9ist>9ine'or3>%rea field.T" will be defined as a flat plane at a fi ed elevation.Cal'*late d If Elevation is selected. d %or Points. d By -an%e ' points from a range. $ither manually enter the names of the three points in the edit fields or use the associated "ap and 9ist selection buttons to select these points from the @ob.T" to another . "ore.. the plot will display only the final . . "ore. The plane of pro@ection of the final .T" allows you to create a Topcon tn@ Tin by selecting points from their @ob. A warning message displays if any of the fields is empty or contains a name that does not e ist. choose an option to select multiple points in the @ob for creating the . -. To create a .T". Press the Calc button to calculate the cut and fill volumes and pro@ected areas of a . Creatin$ 2TM !reate .T" &.

If reOuired... press either the "ap selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the map . The name will appear in the edit field. "ore.. d By -adius ' points around a selected point at a certain distance. "ore.<... The list name will appear in the edit field... press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting point list in the @ob. To obtain information about a single point highlighted in the list.< or press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the list . Gou can alter the e'clusion areas and &rea+lines &y movin$ their points up or do#n in the list.. d From Map ' points selected graphically from the map "ore.. d %or Point 9ist. "ore..T". NOTICE NOTICE The points #hose feature code is fla$$ed as &ein$ a &rea+line or e'clusion area $et applied to the ?TM in the order that they appear in the point list. The list will display the points curently selected. d %or 9ine'or3 and %rea. 0rea5lines are linear elements that describe changes in smoothness or continuity of the surface. and the plot will display the created . "ore.more.Cal'*lato& d By Code Strin% ' points of a selected code string. (. d From /ayer ' points on a selected layer.. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button... -. chec5 mar5 the Inclu&e 2rea3lines bo to apply brea5lines and e clusion areas to the .. use the Info button. P/N 7010-0492 73939 .. +.T". "ore.more. d From /ist ' points from a list of points.. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button.

4. or there are not enough points to create a . -. d !lic5 the .T" will be updated. A warning message displays if less than three or no points have been selected. The "ap tab displays the created .. +.T"= d )ighlight the point in the list.T"= d Press the E&it 2oun&ary button. The default name will be newT8N'TN@. Icons you can use "A#N$T %ield general buttons and icons are described here.elete button..T" as the current selected points and the triangulation lines. 74040 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . the -esults tab displays the results updated dynamically as you alter the data. To see a "ap view of the current .T" has been created. highlight the point in the list.T) &. 3.T" or they are incomputable in the current system. To delete any point from the . To alter the boundary of the currently selected . To e&it the . double'clic5 in the plot window. 1. %ind out more. The . To view a point on the plot.T" since several have been e cluded because their code was flagged as not to be used in a . (.T" folder by default.T" created from the selected points in the . Bhen a valid .T".. !lic5 Sa+e to save the ../.

T" with the boundary in red.and . The Info button is used to display information on a single point highlighted in the list. *pens the list of points. The boundary selection dialog contains a list of points.elete button is used to delete the selected points in the point list.own < arrow button is used to move the selected points up . The Arrow control button allows you to use the 5eyboard arrow 5eys to move points inside the list. !onfirms settings. To edit the boundary= P/N 7010-0492 74141 . The 2p . closes the dialog. *pens a map. Editin$ 6 !ndar. and returns to the previous dialog.General Ic n' The .T". which bound the . The Plot button is used to hide and show the plot window. If the current selection is at the top or bottom or nothing is selected the buttons will be disabled accordingly.and down< in the list control. the general plot of the .

88&m. To delete a point from the boundary. -. representing data along contour lines. %ind out description of the icons on the dialog here.T" will be updated.T" will be updated to reflect the changes to the point order. 74242 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .T". (. After each selection the ?TM $ets updated to sho# your selection. NOTICE NOTICE /hen you select a point in the &oundary Map selection dialo$ the point is added &et#een the end points of the se$ment #hich is closest to the selected point.&.T" to add to the boundary.T". The difference between the start and end elevations is divided by the interval to get the number of contour lines. (.. -. $nter an Contour 8nterval between the contour lines in the edit field as reOuired.T" is a method of transforming elevation data into a contoured surface. highlight the point in the list and clic5 the red minus icon. The . The !ontour line interval must be greater than 8..T"= &. To create the contours on the . /hen you return to the Edit 0oundary dialo$ the point list $ets updated to the order of the &oundary in the map. move points up and down the list to change the order of the boundary. !ontouring . Press the "e t button to set the parameters reOuired for contouring the . If reOuired. 2se the "ap or 9ist selection button to select points from all of the points in the . C nt !rin$ 2TM This dialog allows you to contour an e isting Topcon TN@ T8N. $nter the DTM Name manually in the edit field or press the 9ist selection button to select an e isting . The .T" from the list. +. The plot window will display the currently selected .

If reOuired.T"./. If reOuired.T". 1.T" as well as the contour lines in red. The Map tab will display the current selected . 3. Press the Save button to store the contoured . The End Elevation edit field initially shows the highest elevation in the selected . you can enter a different value. The Start Elevation edit field initially shows the lowest elevation in the selected . The results of contouring will be displayed on the -esults tab. .T" name and an integer value starting at & which ma5es the line uniOue.T" and generate the contour lines in the @ob. The lines will be added to the @ob as lines with the . you can enter a different value.

Notes2 .

C-a#te& 5 Ma# P/N 7010-0492 5-1 .

Ma# Map The "ap screen displays the plot of the current @ob. *n the "ain "ap. Properties Selects the map properties to display. 2se the appropriate item from the pop'up menu. Eoom 0y Point Selects a point to center the plot. Eoom Bindow Selects a frame of ob@ects for ?oom'in displayM draw from left to right to get the ob@ect you want. Eoom *ut Eooms the plot outwards. Also. Clic9 a t l ic n t exec!te the c //and: Eoom In Eooms the plot inwards. the viewing tools and the scale. The menu options depend on the ob@ect selected. pressing and holding the stylus on the map area displays the "ap Properties option. The "ain "ap allows you to edit @ob data and to sta5eout desired ob@ects.isplays all ob@ects in the @ob. The "ap maintains the scale after changing the status of the main map. Eoom All . )old the stylus on the selected ob@ect until a pop'up menu displays. 5-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . tap the ob@ect to highlight it.

Ma#

Map Pr pertie'
The "ap Properties dialog allows the user to customi?e the map view adding to the points showing their properties ;names, codes, heights, etc.<, also displaying the Auto Topo points. To enable the points displaying, place a chec5 mar5 in the Sho' Points field. Along with the points their names,co&es,icons, heights, auto topo and>or scanne& points can be displayed. Also it is possible to display roa&s, their stations and templates, lines, their stations and start each time from the current position. !hec5ing the Current Position field also means, if the current position moves off the edge of the map it will automatically snap bac5 to the center.

F

/ InAO!tA5ind =

%or display customi?ing, clic5 7ie'/@8oom In, or 7ie'/@8oom 5ut, or 7ie'/@8oom =in&o' to ?oom the plot inwards, or outwards, or allows the user to select an area to ?oom.

F F

/ All / 6; P int

To view all ob@ects in the map, clic5 7ie'/@8oom %ll.

To select a point for centering, clic5 7ie'/@8oom 2y Point and choose the point in the Select point dialog.

P/N 7010-0492

5-3

Ma#

Notes2

5-4

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

C-a#te& 9

Conne'tions
C nnecti n'
This dialog allows you to perform the following tas5s= &. To select a device type and a configuration style to wor5 at the site. %ind out more....evice connection (. To enable a connection prompt upon starting the @ob. %ind out more....evice connection -. To connect with "A#N$T $nterprise web'server and the pro@ect for data e change. %ind out more...$nterprise !onnection +. To enable automatic connection with the networ5 server. %ind out more...Networ5 connection To enable automatic disconnection with the networ5 server. %ind out more...Networ5 connection

General C nnecti n Settin$'
The #eneral tab of the !onnections dialog allows you to change the type of the device to wor5 and to select a @ob configuration before connecting to the device. .PS Select the #PS type of instrument and the configuration to wor5 in the current @ob. 5ptical Select the *ptical type of instrument and the configuration to wor5 in the current @ob.
P/N 7010-0492

9-0

Conne'tions

Prompt at startup 2nchec5ing this bo will prevent the program from connecting to an instrument until you clic5 the !onnections icon on the main folder or enter a Survey or Sta5eout dialog. )owever, the Networ5 settings will be available. Iou can also set a prompt for connection at startup in the #lobal dialog. Connect>,isconnect !lic5ing this button initiates the connection to the instrument associated with the currently selected configuration or close communication, respectively. %ind out more on 0luetooth connection.

6l!et

th

2e8ice 2i'c 8er;
Select 2luetooth ,e+ice dialog lists all visible 0luetooth .evices. $ach deviceYs name is displayed. If the name cannot be resolved, 0luetooth 2niOue Address is displayed instead. Type of device and its services are displayed if the device provides this information. The dialog title displays the type of device that application tries to connect to. If a device is not present in the list or some devices did not report their names in a timely manner, try refreshing the list using the -e$resh button. If the device is still not listed, then the distance to it can be too large or the device can be connected to a different controller. !onnection with the device is possible even if its name was not resolved and only 0luetooth 2niOue Address is listed. Select button will initiate authentication with device. If 0luetooth hardware is disabled ;powered off< or the controller has an unsupported 0luetooth stac5, a warning will be displayed. !urrently only the "icrosoft 0luetooth stac5 is supported.

9-2

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

Conne'tions

A!thenticati n
The application maintains authentication information independently of 0luetooth 2I in the *perating System. There is no need to pair devices beforehand, the application will perform the pairing. The application supports connections with devices that do not reOuire a PIN code. To use this feature, unchec5 the -e*uire PI" chec5 bo . If the PIN code is provided and a connection is successful, the application will store the PIN code in a protected area for future use. Press Connect button to initiate a connection. If a connection succeeds, 0luetooth 2niOue Address and its authentication will be stored. Ne t time the application will not display the .evice .iscovery.

6l!et

th C nnecti n

Bhen the application tries to establish a connection with 0luetooth port, it displays the %ccessing 2luetooth ,e+ice dialog. The title of the dialog displays the type of device that application tries to connect to. If a connection cannot be established in a timely manner, the dialog will automatically stop the connection. A connection can be cancelled manually and with the Cancel button. It is possible to initiate the .evice .iscovery procedure using the Change ,e+ice button. Also, the device discovery can be initiated by clearing the Connect to the last 2T &e+ice chec5 bo before connecting.

Enterpri'e C nnecti n
The $nterprise tab allows you to establish a connection with an enterprise pro@ect= d $nter your /o%in information for connection to the "agnet $nterprise server. d Select a pro@ect from the Connect to pro(ect drop'down list. Iou can create a new pro@ect using the nearby icon.
P/N 7010-0492

9-3

Conne'tions

d !lic5 Connect to establish the connection. !onnection status displays the result.

Net= r9 C nnecti n Settin$'
The Networ5 tab allows you to manage an automatic connection of the modem to the NTRIP server for Internal !."A and #PRS modems. %uto/Connect Bhen this bo is chec5ed, an automatic connection of the modem is enabled. After clic5ing the bac5 button, the Networ5 tab will display the process of the connection. %ind out more= !onnection to Networ5. If automatic connection is disabled in the !onnections dialog, you can configure the modem from the Status or Topo screens. Chec3 signal *uality Bhen this chec5 bo is selected, the signal Ouality is displayed on the Signal bar. %uto/,isconnect Bhen this chec5 bo is selected, an automatic diconnection and switching off the modem is enabled on e iting "A#N$T %ield.

9-4

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

C-a#te& 10

)ettin. *# GP) )*&$e,
Set!p f lder
0efore conducting the survey you may need to perform some preliminary wor5 that depends upon the current @ob configuration.

Set!p GPS f lder
Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9:

9ocali?ation !alculates locali?ation parameters of the mathematical coordinate transformation between an original coordinate system, in which the @ob points are measured or given, and a local coordinate system, in which control points are 5nown. %ind out more... Start 0ase Sets the 0ase Receiver in RT6 survey. Status .isplays information about the current position of the #NSS receiver, RT6 status, and the satellite constellation. 6nown Pt Init Initiali?es the receiver using 5nown coordinates for the Rover station.

P/N 7010-0492

10-0

The Status dialog contains information about the current position of the receiver. Stat!' This allows you to chec5 the status of a #PS: survey. and the star icon shows the number of satellites used in position determination.)ettin. and the satellite constellation. mm#PS Init Sets up mm#PS: system for RT6 surveying. Simulator Sets initial B#S4+ position for #PS simulation. d !oordinates of the position in the selected coordinate system and units. d P. The loc5 icon signifies the number of the satellites trac5ed.*P valueM it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates will depend on 10-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . d !urrent 2T! time. *# GP) )*&$e. RT6 status. Position System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs P 'iti n Position page displays= d Total number of the available satellites. Static *ccupation Starts logging data at the point occupied for static observations in PP Static survey.

*ther pages in the Status dialog= System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs The icon opens a pop'up menu which varies depending on the configuration type used.#PS ' the command that reinitiali?es the receiver. The field is empty if no differential corrections are received. Settings opens the dialog where $levation "as5 or 0ase "a5e At Rover parameter can be changed. the R"S values of the hori?ontal and vertical coordinates. d ) and C stand for )R"S and CR"S. Stat!' p p"!p /en! The pop'up menu can contain a different set of the following options depending on the configuration type used Rover Antenna Setup !onfig Radio !onfig *mniSTAR !onfig 0eacon !onfig R$'S& Repeater Reset RT6 or Reset .*P is proportional to the estimated position uncertainty. P. d 0ase .)tat*s the measurement errors. mm#PS: *ptions "ission Planning P/N 7010-0492 10-3 .ist= slope distance to base antenna.. "ore. respectively..

Bill display YIesY if "A! is used for position computation. this field will report a dash . d Net-T6 +MAC. d Common Sats ' Number of common satellites between the base and rover. ' Percentage of receiver power remaining. After clearing the NCRA". elevation mas5 and recording interval.i%. and the rover will apply default #9*NASS corrections. and information about the receiverYs internal file system<. ' Percentage of controller power remaining.'te/ *pen the System page to view the information about the current state of the RT6 measurements= d #osition Type ' Indicates the solution type of the position. If the 0ase receiver does not support I#S !lass e tensions to correction formats or if the reOuired RT!" messages were not enabled on the base. Iou can override this by pressing the Settings button in the Status 10-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . d Controller Memory +6B. the receiver will reOuire some time to collect new ephemerides and almanacs . this field will report the 0ase "a5e that was detected by the Rover receiver. Status ' Applies to Networ5 RT6 style with "A! corrections selected. ' Available memory in the receiver for storing TPS files. d Controller #ower+C.such as active antenna input.er'If Automatic detection of 0ase "a5e is selected in style settings. This command will not delete any files from the receiver memory. ' Available memory in the controller.'<. d -eceiver Memory +6B. d -T6 A%e ' Age of the last RT6 message in seconds. S. *# GP) )*&$e.around &/ minutes<. d Base Ma3e at -over ' -e9uires Topcon receiver !)w at rover @'D or . d -adio /in3 'Nuality of the radio lin5. d -eceiver #ower+C.)ettin. !lear NCRA" ' the command that resets the receiver parameters to factory default values . d 8nitiali1ed Sats 'Number of satellites initiali?ed.

RT6< d )P .)tat*s dialog or in the Styles Settings . 4 $ Hi't r. No 0ase "a5e At Rover will be reported by "A#N$T %ield in this mode. the field is divided into /'minute portions P/N 7010-0492 10-0 . ++GP)? te'-nolo.not enough satellites or incorrect antenna model< d Autonomous .#PS .Standalone< d .pe Possible solution types= d No Solution ' receiver cannot produce a solution .C0S< ' indicates .#PS solution produced using code' differential corrections received from an *mnistar satellite T(P TIP ++GP)? sol*tion +a&6e& in i'ates t-at sol*tion 4as #&o *'e *sin.. The 9og )istory tab graphically displays the usage of satellites over time.#PS ' )igh'Precision *mnistar solution d .!ode'differential< d %loat d %i ed . *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs S l!ti n t. %or convenience. a 9og )istory tab is displayed.Advanced<. If the 9og )istory is available.#PS.

*ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot SCs M!lti 6a'e Stat!' The "ulti 0ase Status page displays the information about the current state of the RT6 measurements in the multiple base configuration. -TC / 9in3= the Ouality of the radio lin5 of this base station.= the numerical I.ist= the distance between this base station and the rover. along dotted lines. . -TC / (se= a chec5mar5 indicates this base station is currently used by the RT6 engine.*nly avaliable if this base is currently in use< *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System 9og )istory Scatter Plot SCs 10-1 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . . *# GP) )*&$e. -TC / 2ase= the name of this base station.only avaliable if this base is currently in use< -TC / .*nly avaliable if this base is currently in use< -TC / %ge= the age of the last RT6 message received by this base station. -TC / Type= Indicated the solution type of the position .)ettin. -TC / I. of this base station. The starting time and ne t half hour is mar5ed with time labels.

Show #PS Shows>hides the #PS satellites images. Show #9NS Shows>hides the #9NS satellites images. The buttons on the left of the plot are used to switch between hori?ontal and vertical plots. to ?oom in and out.northing. *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status SCs SD' The SCs page of the Status dialog displays a graphical representation of the position of the satellites on the s5y or the S>N ratios.)tat*s Scatter Pl t The Scatter Plots tab displays the current receiver position changing in time= either the current receiver vertical position or the hori?ontal position relative to the position in a local . 9ist>Plot Toggles the appearance of the dialog between the graphical representation to the table displaying the satellites parameters= P-"= shows the number of the satellite 0>(= shows whether the satellite is healthy or unhealthy P/N 7010-0492 10-7 . and to open properties. #9NS satellites are Zmar5ed with the F:F sign. easting< coordinate system. SNR>S5yplot Toggles the appearance of the dialog to the s5yplot or the signal' to' noise ratio for the satellites.

(. E9= shows the elevation angle of the satellite %8= shows the a?imuth of the satellite S"-1= 9& signal to noise ratio S"-2= 9( signal to noise ratio (SE. 10-5 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .)ettin. To perform mission planning= &.. +. The /ocal field displays the date and time . *ther pages in the Status dialog= Position System 9og )istory "ulti 0ase Status Scatter Plot Mi''i n Plannin$ The "ission Planning option enables you to e amine the e pected observation conditions . This can be done in order to find out the best timing for observations at the specified point.such as satellite visibility and P.the celestial sphere<.= shows whether the satellite is used in position computation. *# GP) )*&$e. column header.*P<. *nce the "ission Planning Setting dialog is closed the "ission Planning dialog will calculate and show the position of satellites in the first ten minutes of the specified time on the S3y #lot . !onfigure settings for observations in the Mission #lannin% Settin% dialog. Iou can select whether a satellite should be used or not by selecting the corresponding row for the satellite in the list and clic5ing on the 2S$.. This will toggle the use of the satellite. -. Select Setup > Status and the Mission #lannin% option from the pop'up menu. "ore.local time< of the calculation result.

If reOuired. 1. The dialog also provides information about the given position as applied to the calculations. respectively 7. To view different graphical satellite information. change the $levation "as5 from the default &/ degrees for a desired value. select a desired option from the drop'down selection list= S5y Plot Sat 9ist Sat Num P. -. unchec5 the corresponding bo . and the number of G#S and G/&NASS. If reOuired. the #D&# value. 3. Q or a to move forward or bac5ward. you can hide all the #PS or #9*NASS satellites from the view. To do this.*P Mi''i n Plannin$ Settin$ To configure settings for "ission Planning= &. Select the Date and Start and End Time of observations as reOuired. Ia to return to the start time &8. 2se the appropriate button to calculate and show the satellites in every ten minutes of the specified time= 4. P/N 7010-0492 10-9 . II to pause at any ten'minute interval &&. $nter the coordinates of the current position in one of the two possible ways d automatically by clic5ing d manually in the current coordinate system after clic5ing (.)tat*s /.

)ettin. Press it to stop logging the position. *nce pressed. Start Base The Start 0ase dialog contains information about the 0ase receiver and can be used for setting the 0ase Receiver. Auto Pos $nables you to measure the position of the current point. The Pos field appears and shows the number of the measurements used for averaging. Satellite 4i't The Satellite 9ist option allows you to view graphically the availability of either #PS or #9*NASS satellites changing in the specified time. Point $nter the name of the point where the 0ase receiver is located.*P value changing in the specified time.*P option allows you to view graphically the P. Satellite N!/&er The Satellite Number option allows you to view graphically the total number of #PS and #9*NASS satellites changing in the specified time. P2OP The P. !oordinates The coordinates of the base position in the selected coordinate system. The average coordinates will be displayed. the button changes its name to Stop. *# GP) )*&$e. or can be entered manually. It can be chosen from the map or the list of the @ob points. Ant )t 101010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

. M!lti 6a'e The "ulti 0ase dialog sets the multi base mode for RT6 survey. opens a pop'up menu of the following options. $ach base in a networ5 must have a uniOue I.< 2se "ulti 0ase $nables multi base mode for surveying. Transmit .)ta&t <ase The measured antenna height and type . . $ach base should be set at least (/8 milliseconds apart from any other.At least /88 milliseconds for data transfer rates less than 7188 bps. which is sent as part of the !"R: messages.. 0ase Station I. The identifying number of the base. This parameter is set to ensure that the radio signals from multiple bases do not overlap. The icon "ore.elay Signal transmission delay from the current base. Start 6a'e p p"!p /en! The pop'up menu can contain the following options= Status !onfig Radio depends on the configuration for the survey "ulti 0ase P/N 7010-0492 101111 . Start 0ase Sets the receiver as a 0ase transmitting the selected coordinates.vertical or slant< of measurement..

ground< system and other .vertical or slant< of measurement. *# GP) )*&$e. The 9ocali?ation dialog contains a list of points used for locali?ation. or can be entered manually. Their coordinates are 5nown in both systems= local . . Static Occ!pati n The Static *ccupation dialog allows the configuration of the receiver for a Post'Processed static occupation of the survey mar5er. It can be chosen from the map or the list of the @ob points. Ant )t The measured antenna height and type .B#S4+< system. It will be included in the raw #PS data file.uration The length of time you want the receiver to log data to the raw #PS data file. in which the @ob points are measured. Start *cc This button starts the logging of epochs into the raw #PS data file.)ettin.F6nown PointF< and @ob coordinate system . Localization The 9ocali?ation is used for transformation of the coordinates between a local . !ode The code you want assigned to the point. $ach point has a level of reliability specified 101212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .F"easured PointF<. These are called control points. Point $nter the name of the point where the static receiver is located.

that shows the status of the point. $dit *pens the 9ocali?ation Point dialog to change the control point added. Related tas5s= d 0asic !oncept of 9ocali?ation d 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on B#S4+ d 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on any .o'ali=ation with the values of the residuals along the hori?ontal and the vertical a es and the !ontrol parameters.ob P/N 7010-0492 101313 .ata to *ther .atum or #rid selections are available only if you selected a specific coordinate system in the !oordinate System dialog before visiting the 9ocali?ation dialog. The B#S4+ selection is always available. Add *pens the 9ocali?ation Point dialog for adding control points.etails *pens the 9ocali?ation Results dialog. Settings *pens the Survey parameters dialog. Type Allows you to select the type of 9ocali?ation . *n 9ocali?ation dialog it is possible to change the 9ocali?ation type after control points were added. ..by the @ob coordinate system<.atum d 9ocali?ation with any Predefined or !reated Pro@ection d *ne'point 9ocali?ation d Two'point 9ocali?ation d Three'point 9ocali?ation d Performing 9ocali?ation d Importing 9ocali?ation . Remove Removes the highlighted points. .

the scale parameter 101414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . h8<.)ettin. Add 4 caliBati n P int The Add 9ocali?ation Point dialog contains the coordinates of the control point added to locali?ation. *6= Saves the point and returns to the 9ocali?ation dialog with a newly added point. Iou can enter a new point. If a point with the same name already e ists. (se 7ertical= set if the point should be used for the vertical locali?ation. (se 0ori1ontal= specifies that a point should be used for the hori?ontal locali?ation. $8. Iou can overwrite. rename. 4 caliBati n 1e'!lt' The 9ocali?ation Results dialog contains the calculated parameters of the locali?ation= the global coordinates . The $poch !ount field shows the number of the accepted epochs. Iou can enter a new point. Start )eas= Sets the control point to the current location. The type of transformation can be selected in 9ocali?ation dialog. Point= Sets the name of the control point.ground< coordinate system. The parameters of the logging are set through the Survey Parameters dialog. 6nown Point The 6nown Point field contains the coordinates of the point in the local . the application will open the Point !hec5 notification dialog. Bhen computing locali?ation parameters these coordinates will be transformed to the local system. $lev8<. Point= sets the name of the control point. *# GP) )*&$e. the corresponding local coordinates . 9on8. or store the point as a chec5 point. select a point from the map or from the list.9at8. select a point from the map or from the list. "easured Point The "easured Point field contains the coordinates of the control point in the coordinate system that is set for the current @ob.N8.

It can be chosen from the map or the list of the @ob points. "oving speed and direction can be changed in the main map or in the Topo dialog using arrows.)i+*lato& . It is optionally used with single freOuency receivers and for Ouality control on dual freOuency receivers. "ore. the current position starts to drift immediately. the rotation parameter . Ant )t P/N 7010-0492 101010 . !oordinates The coordinates of the rover position in the selected coordinate system. 3n =n P int InitialiBati n The 6nown Point Initiali?ation is used to initiali?e the receiver using the 5nown coordinates for the Rover station. If simulation moving speed is not ?ero. from the )ome menu. The current position is remembered between TopS2RC runs... this option is absent in the menu. $nter the name of the point where the 0ase receiver is located. To show it. Si/!lat r Allows you to setup the initial B#S4+ position for #PS simulation. 0y default. clic5 Point and then . or can be entered manually.A?< and the plane slope angles corresponding to north and east directions.Scale<.

d The Residuals. Transmitter .ata Transmitter Position Sensor 101111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Initiali?e Initiali?ed the receiver as a rover with the specified coordinates of 6PI Position. //GPS InitialiBati n The Init mm#PS: dialog contains information about the calibration of the laser transmitter and initiali?ation of the sensor. The measured antenna height and type . The loc5 icon signifies the number of the satellites trac5ed.*P valueM it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates will depend on the measurement errors. *# GP) )*&$e. P. d The current 2T! time.)ettin.*P is proportional to the estimated position uncertainty. the R"S values of the hori?ontal and vertical coordinates. d 6PR Status= If it is Initiali?ing or Initiali?ed. d ) and C stand for )R"S and CR"S. respectively.vertical or slant< of measurement. the star icon shows the number of satellites used in position determination. 3PI P 'iti n The Position page displays= d The total number of the available satellites. d The P.

The bitmap in the upper'left corner of the dialog displays a floating menu of the following items= Field Calibration= *pens the !alibration dialog to set the transmitter to calibrate . d 6nown #oint &!!set= *pens the 6nown Point *ffset dialog. #oint= The point over which the transmitter is setup. Tran'/itter P 'iti n The Trans Pos tab allows you to set up the transmitterYs height and location at the @obsite.e.++GP) (nitiali=ation The icon in the upper'left corner of the dialog displays a pop' up menu of the following items= d Field Calibration= *pens the !alibration dialog to set the transmitter to calibrate . The 9ist contains the following items= Name= The name of the transmitter. to fi errors in incline in the selfleveling mechanism of the transmitter<. Resect *pens the Resect dialog to perform resection for an un5nown transmitter location.i. $dit *pens the 6nown Point dialog to select the point over which the transmitter is setup. 6nown #oint &!!set= *pens the 6nown Point *ffset dialog. P/N 7010-0492 101717 . to fi errors in incline in the self'leveling mechanism of the transmitter<.elete Removes the transmitter from the list.e. 8D= The channel of the transmitter.i. .

The transmitterYs channel. Resect *pens the Resect dialog to perform resection for an un5nown transmitter location.)ettin. #oint= The point over which the transmitter is setup. Sensor #ain Sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitterYs laser beam. The 9ist contains the following items= Name= The name of the transmitter.elete Removes the transmitter from the list. $dit *pens the 6nown Point dialog to select the point over which the transmitter is setup. The ANI selection will allow the sensor to independently select the transmitter with the smallest error rate. 8D= The channel of the transmitter. Transmitter I. Init Time Improvement !hec5 this bo to improve the RT6 fi time for the receiver. Sen' r The Sensor tab uploads transmitter calibration information to the sensor and sets up the sensor for receiving the transmitterYs laser beam. . Receiver Port The receiver port that connects the receiver and sensor. Tran'/itter P 'iti n The Trans Pos tab allows you to set up the transmitterYs height and location at the @obsite. *# GP) )*&$e. Init Sensor 101515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

6nown Point $nable this when occupying a 5nown point. The type of the position calculation method. The Ouality of the radio lin5.isplays the number of #PS epochs used in the resection calculation during the measurement. After pressing. "eas The number of measurement. the button changes the name to Stop. respectively. 1e'ect //Gp'> Sen' r The Resect dialog is used to measure an un5nown transmitter location using the rover and three or more points. Start Starts the measurement process. The Sensor tab is similar to P/N 7010-0492 101919 . 9ogging . The R"S errors for hori?ontal and vertical coordinates. respectively.++GP) (nitiali=ation Starts initiali?ation process. The upper'right corner of the dialog displays information about the current state of measurement= The mm#PS icon displays the sensor that receives the transmitterYs beam. and select a point to occupy using the map and list buttons. and the counter of the epochs collected appears. 1e'ect //Gp'> 1e'ect The Resect tab is used to perform the resection calculation from the rover point to the point over which the transmitter is set. The number of the satellites trac5ed and used in position calculation. )t The antennaYs height and method of height measurement.

6nown Trans )or? Pos If selected. then after pressing the Init Sensor button. . Sensor #ain Sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitterYs laser beam. Init Sensor Starts the initiali?ation of the sensor. *# GP) )*&$e. Select the point over which the transmitter is setup. Re'"eas !lears all data and restarts the resection process. Init Time Improvement Select to improve the RT6 fi time for the receiver. Receiver Port Sets the receiver port that connects the receiver and sensor.ata tab is used to view the results of resection measurements.)ettin. Tran'/itter The Transmitter dialog sets the transmitter parameters. Accept *pens the Add Point dialog to view the point information for the transmitter. Name 102020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . the 6nown Point dialog displays.isplays the channel of the transmitter. the Sensor tab on the Init mm#PS: dialog and used to set up the sensor. Transmitter I. 2ata The . .ata will display only after three or more points have been measured.

#et .ata The status of calibration data. 2pdate . !alibration .ata dialog will be displayed after performing %ield !alibration if it is determined that the transmitter leveling offsets need to be ad@usted. and !alibration .ata fields. P/N 7010-0492 102121 . I. !om Port The communication port of the controller used to connect to the transmitter. Field Cali&rati n The %ield !alibration dialog selects the transmitter for field calibration. !om Port The communication port of the controller used to connect to the transmitter. 0pdate Cali&rati n 2ata The 2pdate !alibration . Transmitter Name The name of the transmitter to calibrate.ata Sends the offset info to the transmitter. !lear .ata !lear the I. The channel of the transmitter.++GP) (nitiali=ation The name of the transmitter.ata Retrieves the transmitterYs data.

It can be selected using the map or list buttons. Transmitter Name . Point The point to be occupied. 3n =n P int The 6nown Point dialog is used to select the 5nown point over which the transmitter is setup and enter the transmitter height. This can be used as an ad@ustment for the transmitter height.isplays the name of the transmitter. *# GP) )*&$e.isplays the name of the transmitter. (m %i ed Tripod This bo can be chec5ed if using a ( meter fi ed tripod. 102222 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . I. .isplays the difference in height between the 5nown measurement and the current rover measurement. 3n =n P int Off'et The 6nown Point *ffset is used to compute the height offset between the rover and a currently occupied 5nown point. )eight *ffset .isplays the transmitterYs channel. Point The point the transmitter is installed over. Transmitter Name . It can be selected using the map or list buttons.)ettin. )t Sets the height of the transmitter from the ground to the mar5 on the transmitterYs side and the method of height meaurement in the specified units.

)eight . The current status of the receiverYs mm#PS: engine is displayed as *N.I#S !lass< used by the Rover receiver to account for #9*NASS biases. Settin$' Ele+ation mas3 sets the parameter re@ecting low'elevation satellites while positioning. 2ase )a3e at -o+er allows you to designate 0ase "a5e . *%% or . the button changes it name on Stop. 2se weighted height computations The mm#PS: height can be computed using weights for the laser and #PS data. The mm#PS: icon will change if the difference is over this limit. a greater weight is applied to the laser measurement when the rover is closer to the transmitter or to the #PS measurement when the rover is further away. Bhen this bo is chec5ed. This mode is recommended when wor5ing under a tree canopy or in other cases of high multipath. This also P/N 7010-0492 102323 .. Start Starts the measurement process. //GPS> Opti n' The mm#PS: *ptions dialog allows modification of various mm#PS: functions. Canopy En+ironment chec5 bo instructs the RT6 engine to use less rigid thresholds when filtering out measurement outliers.isplays the number of #PS epochs used in the measurement.++GP) (nitiali=ation $poch !ount . Iou can change the status by using the combo bo to turn the mm#PS: engine *N or *%%. and the counter of the epochs collected appears.ifference 9imit Set a limit for the difference between #PS and mm#PS: height measurements. After pressing.ISA09$.

the settin$s are applied upon closin$ the dialo$. Se''i n' The Sessions dialog allows you to configure and edit automatic surveys and install them into TPS receivers. The YAY 0uttons The left hand button can be used to remove a Session survey configuration from the Sessions list.)ettin. easing the tas5 of controlling multiple'receiver surveys. Refresh This button refreshes the active sessions list from the current receiver. NOTICE NOTICE If the receiver is connected. *# GP) )*&$e. allows you to override 0ase "a5e automatically detected by the Rover receiver if this information is transmitted by the 0ase. The right hand button allows the addition of a new receiver to the Receivers list. The YAddY 0uttons The left hand button opens the Session Setup dialog in which you enter or edit the Session survey configurations. Se''i n' The Sessions dialog is accessed through the e port menu item. It allows you to import automatic surveys from TPS receivers into the controller. The right hand button can be used to remove a receiver from the Receiver list. The receivers can each be given a descriptive name and added to a list. 102424 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . The Y'QY 0utton 2se this button to add a Session survey configuration to a receiver in the Receivers list.

Interval The time between sucessive epochs logged to the raw data file. . and whether the antenna is static or roving.)essions $ port This button sends the selected session to the receiver. Site Name The name of the site where the receiver will be placed for the survey. Start Time The day of wee5 and the local time that the receiver will start the survey. Se''i n Set!p Session setup allows you to program a session which can then be loaded into the receiver to automatically start logging data at a specific date and time. $nd Time The day of wee5 and the local time that the receiver will end the survey. "in SCs The minimum number of SCs to use when logging an epoch. Type Type of survey. Ant )t The measured antenna height and type . $pochs containing fewer satellites will not be logged to the raw data file.vertical or slant< of measurement. either static or 5inematic.

*# GP) )*&$e. Notes2 .)ettin.

S!r8e. Tape . S!r8e. A?imuth D *ffset and *ffset 9aser.C-a#te& 11 GP) )*&$e. and the offset from the road. relative to the two 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure. %ind out more on *ffsets. Auto Topo !onducts a survey with #PS dynamic points. %ind Station Identifies the station by the distance. A'Section Performs a survey of a road cross'section. f lder Survey types depend upon the current @ob configuration.: To po !onducts a survey with #PS static points and determine inaccessible points by setting offsets from measured points= *ffset 9ine. GPS Clic9 an ic n t 'tart the de'ired '!r8e. P/N 7010-0492 11-1 . computed to the station.imentions !alculates the periphery of structures using tape measurements.

Point . Pressing the F.GP) )*&$e. The point is automatically saved. Start 9og .isplays the code for the point.onesYF string.present for the survey modes that include PP< Starts Raw data logging into the receiver.. if it meets the criteria for 9ogging the point as specified in Settings. Multiple Codes= opens the "ultiple !ode Strings dialog.onesY and will not ta5e into consideration all the other poles. you will be able to select only the poles of . Settings . Control Code= opens the !ontrol code dialog. The Topo page contains the initial data for the survey and displays the progress of the survey.F button in the !ode field displays the menu= Strin%= switches on the String field on the Topo tab. %or e ample. the code FPoleF also has the F.isplays the name of the point to be logged. In the upper right corner of the dialog the information about the receiver operation is located. After pressing the button changes it name to Accept and a new button !ancel appears along with the count of the epochs achieved. String is a specifying parameter for a code that allows you to group the ob@ects with one code according to some specified attribute. Ant )t The measured antenna height and type . Start Starts the survey process. T p The Topo dialog enables you to initiate a static survey. It duplicates the information on the Status dialog. $poch count Shows the number of the epochs used in averaging the position. Note= opens the Notes dialog.. Processing the points. !ode .vertical or slant< of measurement.

Note= opens the Notes dialog..isplays the name of the point to be logged.F button in the !ode field displays the menu= Strin%= switches on the String field on the Topo tab.onesY and will not ta5e into consideration all the other poles. Control Code= opens the !ontrol code dialog. The Auto Topo page contains the initial data for the survey and displays the progress of the survey. Point .A*to To#o *pens the Survey Parameters dialog. All the survey process can be done through this page as well. It contains the information similar to the To po dialog. you will be able to select only the poles of .. .isplays the code for the point. Processing the points. In the upper right corner of the dialog the information about the receiver operation is located.ata page contains the information of the base and the last point that has been logged since this dialog was opened.onesYF string. Map The "ap tab shows the stored points graphically. the code FPoleF also has the F. Pressing the F. %or e ample. Ant )t . A!t T p The Auto Topo dialog enables you to initiate a dynamic survey.Also the FDF sign appears indicating string< String is a specifying parameter for a code that allows you to group the ob@ects with one code according to some specified attribute. !ode . 2ata The Topo'. Multiple Codes= opens the "ultiple !ode Strings dialog.

Pause Interrupts the survey. The !oordinates of the 0ase are displayed and the vectors to the base from the rover of the collected points. the button changes its name to Resume. 1a= Gp'> All the raw data collected is displayed in a list on this dialog. The measured antenna height and type . After pressing this button.#PS and PP 6inematic modes< Starts Raw data logging into the receiver. 1a= 2ata 9ists all the coordinates>measurement information of the selected raw data record.GP) )*&$e.vertical or slant< of measurement. .ouble clic5 on a line to see the . the column titles reflect the data in that line.PP . Bhen a line is selected. 9og Now Stores the current position of the receiver antenna.ata in a separate dialog. Start Starts the survey process. Settings *pens the Survey Parameters dialog. %irst "oves the cursor to the first observation in the raw data. After pressing this button. Start 9og . Add Notes . The vectors are only displayed for the points collected with fi ed solutions. 9ast "oves the cursor to the last observation in the raw data. the button changes the name to Stop and the Pause button becomes available.

A? . Gp' Off'et' The *ffsets tab allows you to set the offset point for the measurement. Cl Co&e= .istance')eight dialog to define a point set by the offset from a point. where the cross section survey is to be performed.is )t *pens the A?imuth'.isplays a dialog to enter additional notes for an observed point. 9aser Present if 9aser has been selected in the !onfiguration.C&oss )e'tion . select the Survey'QA'Section menu. %ind by !ode %inds a point by its code. 9ine *pens the 9ine dialog to define a point set by the offset from a line. if a Road is selected. To start wor5ing. %ind Ne t %inds the ne t point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the previous %ind. -oa& $nter the name of the Road manually or select the road from the list. %ind by Point %inds a point by its name or a part of the name. *pens the 9aser dialog for measurement to define a point. Cr '' Secti n The !ross'Section tas5 allows the user to perform the survey of the cross section. The !ross Section dialog contains the settings of the station.

$nter the code and attributes of the center line points.GP) )*&$e. Find Stati n The "easurement tab of the %ind Station dialog is used for the identification of the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the pro@ection of the station to the road. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. Road Type the name for the road or select it from the list. or select one from the drop'down list. This field is shown only if the road is set. !ode can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Insert manually. Ant )t . Station>Chainage Sets the station where the cross section is surveyed. Cr '' Secti n This dialog appears only if a Road has not been selected for the cross section. Point The name of the point to %ind Station for or to store after ta5ing a measurement. This field is shown only if the road is set. and the offset of the station from the center line of the road. Station>Chainage $nter the Station>!hainage for the recorded cross section. Inter+al The increment of distance towards the ne t station.

ist 9eft and . !ode can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list.ist Right values. Pt Sta !omputes the offsets of the selected point. The point is automatically saved. Start Starts the survey process. These set the direction of the ne t movement. . Also the measurement type for the height needs to be specified= slant or vertical. %inish *pens the floating menu of two items= Close #oly%on" connects the first and the last two points with a line. After pressing the button. Accept Applies the taped distance to the perimeter line.ARP< above the mar5.im tab contains the settings for performing the survey.ist 9eft>. Tape 2i/en'i n The Tape . !urr Sta !omputes and displays the offsets to the current point. Point The name of the ne t point in the survey. !ode The code and attributes of the Point.Ta#e 9i+ension $nter the height of the antenna reference point . if it meets the criteria for 9ogging the point as specified in Settings. relative to the previous direction. . the name changes to Accept and a new button !ancel appears along with the count of the epochs achieved. The field below sets the distance to move.ist Right Toggles between .

This is done using tape measurements. Also.can be entered manually.ialog. Calc Closure" calculates the difference between the last and the first points.wall of the building<. relative to the two 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure .imension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of structures. forming the reference line.isplays the name of the point to be logged. Ant )t .can be entered manually. This will automatically update from the ne t line. or chosen from the map or list< and code. 1ef 4ine The Tape . you should define the plane. $nd Pt !ontains the properties of the ending point= the name . such as buildings. C"Secti n The A'Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line. Point . The points are surveyed similar to the *bservations from the Topo . Also the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button. Start Pt !ontains the properties of the starting point= the name . !ode $nter the !ode and Arributes for the Point the first time a line is recorded. or chosen from the map or list< and code. If the road has not been set. The Ref 9ine tab contains information about the two points comprising the reference line.GP) )*&$e. the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button. that have features perpendicular to each other.

PT9< is a method of interpretation of the point coordinates. Start Ref Point. The coordinates are defined through the two reference points. Select these points from the map or select from the list of points. 2ata The A'Sect . $nd Ref Point The names of the reference points. Start Starts the survey process. Map The "ap tab shows the stored points graphically. .vertical or slant< of measurement. If an alignment has been defined the offset values get displayed as well. PT9 "ode *n $nables the PT9 mode if chec5ed. PT4 M de The Point'To'9ine mode . Along !9>*ffset The offset values for the current position get displayed if a Road has been selected. The line trace through these points is set as one a is and its perpendicular as another.ata page contains the information of the base and the last point that has been logged since this dialog was opened.>-)e'tion The measured antenna height and type . $poch count Shows the number of the epochs used in averaging the position. The point is automatically saved if it meets the criteria for 9ogging the point as specified in Settings. Pressing the button changes the name to Accept and a new button !ancel appears along with the count of the epochs achieved. All the survey process can be done through this page as well.

by selecting from the map or the list.when we have an encoder<. 0S A?imuth>0S Point Iou can enter the 0S A?imuth value. 9aser )I )eight of the device above the *cc Point. select the 0S point. !ode !ode of the point being measured. 0S "eas. or obtain it from the 0S dialog .when we have an encoder<. 4a'er Set!p *cc Point The occupation point can be selected by either entering the name.GP) )*&$e. or can be obtained from the 0S dialog .when we have encoder< Ta5es you to the 9aser 0S "eas dialog. Point Name of the Point being measured. There is a message window which guides you on what to do and displays the measurement values. 11-10 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

using measurements to two . in which the @ob points are measured or given. 0enchmar5 !omputes the elevation of an occupation point. . )et*# Set!p Optical ?T tal Stati n@ f lder Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9: 9ocali?ation !alculates locali?ation parameters of the mathematical coordinate transformation between an original coordinate system.or more< points with 5nown coordinates.. Remote !trl Transmits commands from the controller to the motori?ed total station.. where the instrument is set up. %ind out more. 0ac5sight Sets up a Total Station survey with a reference direction. where the instrument is set up. in which control points are 5nown. and a local coordinate system. Resection !omputes the coordinates of an occupation point.C-a#te& 12 O#ti'al )*&$e. using measurements to two .or more< points with 5nown elevations.

The *cc. The bitmap ne t to the 0S !ircle field brings up the floating menu that recommends for you to set the 0S !ircle value to ?ero or a?imuth. 12-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Elevation= opens the $levation dialog. This is useful when one target is mounted at the 0S for the duration of an occupation and another is used for the sideshots. Point floating menu allows access to the= -esection= opens the Resection dialog that allows you to determine the occupation point coordinates by solving the resection tas5. using the 5nown point coordinates. !hec5 0S *pens the !hec5 0ac5sight dialog for the bac5sight point chec5ing. Point The name of the point where the total station is located. )I Set the height of the instrument above the mar5. or to change the value by :>' 78 or &48 degrees. )et*# 6S S!r8e. The 0ac5sight Survey dialog contains the parameters of the 0ac5sight station. 0S Point . The 0S Setup page contains following parameters= *cc. "easure distance to 0S Set if the distance to bac5sight point should be measured. )R Set the height of the target above the mar5.O#ti'al )*&$e.isplays the hori?ontal circle reading corresponding to the bac5sight point. %i ed )R at 0S Set if the height of the bac5sight point is fi ed for the whole set of measurements. 0S !ircle .0S A?imuth< Set the bac5sight point location or the direction to it.

istance< There are two fields in the top of the page where one can see the height of the instrument and the a?imuth. There are two fields in the top of the page where one can see the height of the instrument and the a?imuth. Edit -aw= opens the Raw TS dialog. The . The bitmap on the upper'left corner brings up the following pop'up menu list= Edit #oints= opens the Points list. )! Set P/N 7010-0492 12-3 . 8ntersection= opens the Intersection !*#* dialog. . "eas 0S "easures the 0ac5sight point. !hec5 distance to 0S Set if it is necessary to chec5 the distance to the bac5sight point along with the angle measurement . Chec9 6ac9'i$ht The !hec5 0ac5sight dialog contains information about the bac5sight point errors. north and height<.<) )*&$e. Angle right A?imuth )A .Slope .east.when pressing the !hec5 button<.Certical Angle< S. !hec5 !hec5s the errors in angle and distance measurements and displays them on the dialog.ata page displays the available values of the bac5sight point parameters= 9ocal coordinates .)ori?ontal Angle< CA . )! Set Sets the hori?ontal circle as defined in the 0S !ircle field. Settings *pens the "ode dialog. 8nverse= opens the Inverse !*#* dialog.

Search "a5e the instrument search for the prism. It shows the current values of the total station measurements and provides a set of tools for the control. you can control the total station through the radio. All the observations can be done in the remote mode as well if the instrument chosen is robotic. There are four types= no data. 9oc5 9oc5s onto the prism or trac5s it. )et*# Sets the hori?ontal circle to the selected value. R!'( is the Remote !ontrol System ( for optical communications. Turn *pens the Rotate dialog which allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points. The button with arrows. and receiving data. 1e/ te C ntr l %rom the Remote !ontrol dialog. Nloc5 Sends the FNuic5loc5F or FTurn AroundF command which will cause the Total Station to search for the R!'(. %or instructions on how to operate the R!'( device. consult the instruction manual for R!'(. turning.ata Indicator above the Nloc5 button shows the current state of the Total Station. 1 & tic Arr =' The buttons allow turning the total station on devices without arrow 5eys. The . Ouerying status. switches the 5eyboard control on and off and shows the current status of the switch. 12-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .O#ti'al )*&$e. Stop "a5es the total station stop trac5ing the prism and go into a FStandbyF mode.

in which case a least'sOuared weighing is used.efault "easurement Accuracy P/N 7010-0492 12-0 . Additional points can also be measured. Bith angle'only measurements. or -. 1e'ecti n Opti n' The resection options dialog controls the input parameters and options for the implementation of the least sOuares solution. Two points with distance measurements are the minimum reOuired to determine the occupation coordinates and the bac5sight constant. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Point The 5nown point name. this determines whether the least sOuares solution is split into hori?ontal and vertical solutions or performed as a single -. 2se . . !ode The 5nown point code. solution. resection.7ese'tion $ach button corresponds to a direction to turn.points are reOuired. "eas Ta5es the sideshot to the point. plus the button in the center can be used to stop turning. 1e'ecti n The method of resection allows you to define the hori?ontal coordinates for the occupation point. )R The height of the rod. Resection Type Bhether you are performing a (. resection. Resection "ethod Bhen performing a -.

PP" Part per million error in the distance measurement. 12-1 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Cert Angle $rror in the vertical angle measurement. )or? Angle $rror in the hori?ontal angle measurement. .istance $rror in the distance measurement. )et*# Sets the system default values for measurement accuracy.O#ti'al )*&$e.

and then crossing bac5 in the opposite direction at a different location along the road. "issing 9ine $mulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to the Raw . S!r8e.C-a#te& 13 O#ti'al )*&$e.ata database. A'Section *btains the coordinates of points that lie on a plane perpendicular to a road center line. %ind out more on *ffsets. Optical ?T tal Stati n@ Clic9 an ic n t 'tart the de'ired '!r8e.istance only with Robotic instruments.imentions !alculates the periphery of structures using tape measurements. computed to the station.: To po !onducts a survey with sideshot points. and determine inaccessible points by setting *ffsets from measured points. This type of survey is typically performed by moving from one side of a road to the other in the cross'sectional plane. and the offset from the road. P/N 7010-0492 13-1 . relative to the two 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure. Tape . Auto Topo !ollects points by Time and . %ind Station Identifies the station by the distance.

Point Sets the current point name. )R Sets the height of the target above the mar5 . !ode Sets the !ode for the current point.O#ti'al )*&$e. )ultiple Co&e= opens the "ultiple !ode Strings dialog.rod height<. "ote= opens the Notes dialog. "onitor "easures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms. The measurement to a single point is ta5en using the . . . T p S!r8e. This can be entered manually or chosen from the dropdown list. Control Co&e= opens the !ontrols dialog.with or without images< with Robotic and motori?ed reflectorless instruments.ir dialog contains the initial data for the performing single sideshots and displays the information during survey.irect position of the Total Station.uring the survey the numerical part of the name changes automatically by one. PT9 )o&e= opens the PT9 "ode dialog. Scanning !ollects points by scanning . Side'h t"2irect The Sideshot'. The bitmap ne t to the Attributes 9ist bitmap brings up the following list= String= displays a control to enter the string for the point. The measurements are recorded into the raw data file.

This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot'.irect dialog e cept that one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single one. *ne measurement is the bac5sight in .irect phase or the %oresight in Reverse phase in two positions of the Total Station. These measurements are used to eliminate the Certical circle centering errors. Plunge ' %lip and Rotate the Total station by &48 degrees to get the reverse measurement<. An$Adi't Set'"2irA1e8 In this method for the measurement to a single point. the instrument will use the specified Angle seOuence to perform repeated measurements. "eas Ta5es a measurement and logs the point.irect dialog e cept that one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single one. )? Angle . These measurements are used to eliminate centering errors in the hori?ontal and vertical circles. This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot'.. The seOuence of four measurements constitutes one set.irect Position and the Reverse Position of the Total Station .e.Offsets 0S Setup *pens the 0ac5sight Survey dialog for setting the bac5sight point.i. Side'h t"2irectA1e8er'e The measurement to a single point is ta5en using the . *ne set consists of one direct and one reverse measurement. Off'et' The *ffsets page contains a set of tools for defining the offsets.

O#ti'al )*&$e. ( 9ine ISection .etermines a point .efines a point using the hori?ontal and vertical angles. Station $nter the station along the road where this point should occur.etermines a point by the intersection of the two lines. . *ffset $nter the offset from the road where this point should occur.efines a point giving you the ability to add or subtract distances. $ach line is defined by two points or two measurements. )?'Ct Angle . hori?ontally and vertically. offset and elevation in relation to a road. .etermines a point that is in a distance from a line defined by two points.!orner< by a plane defined by three points and hori?ontal and vertical angle measurements. Plane D !orner . 9ine D *ffset . 9ine D !orner .etermines a point on the corner using one line defined by two points and a hori?ontal angle measurement. *ffset . Road The referenced alignment can be a road or hori?ontal alignment.ist. Stati n and Off'et The Station and *ffset dialog allows the bac5sight or occupation point to be determined by the station. 13-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .efines a point using the hori?ontal angle from one point and the distance to another.

)R Sets the target height above the mar5 . Point Name for the offset point to be stored. Settings *pens the "ode dialog. !ode P/N 7010-0492 13-0 . A Side measurement provides CA. !an be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )A. and distance measurements. HBADt An$le Off'et The Survey *ffsets dialog in the )?'Ct Angle mode contains data for definition of a point using the hori?ontal and vertical angles and a distance. HA Off'et The Sideshot page of the )ori?ontal Angle *ffset dialog contains data for definition of a point using the hori?ontal angle from one point and the distance to another. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. Side and !enter Iou should measure to !enter and obtain the vertical angle and hori?ontal angle measurements. Point Name for the offset point to be stored.Offsets $levation $nter the elevation of the point.rod height<. Bith these two sets of measurements. the computation can be made for point at center of a tree.

Towardsets the distance between the current point and the pro@ection of the offset point on the line of sight.istance "easures the slope distance to target. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode for the offset point to be stored.istance *ffset dialog contains data for the definition of a point giving the ability to add or subtract distances.O#ti'al )*&$e. . -i%. hori?ontally and vertically. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 . The . )A>CA !ombines the hori?ontal angle and vertical angle measurements with distance logged in . )R Sets the target height.istance *ffsets field contains the three parameters of the offset= Downsets the height of the point relatively to the current position. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. ta5ing into consideration its location relative to the line of sight. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list.rod height<.istance step to determine the point location. 2i'tance Off'et The . "eas Performs the measurement. 13-1 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .tsets the distance between the offset point and its pro@ection.

$ach line is defined by two points or two measurements. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. Rod Pt& "easures the first target on the rod. Rod Pt( "easures the second target on the rod.Offsets Hidden P int The "easurement tab of the )idden Point dialog allows you to define a point on the ground surface with a slanted rod touching the ground point.rod height<. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 . This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. 9ine & Pt& P/N 7010-0492 13-7 . !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. T= 4ine Inter'ecti n The Intersection dialog contains data for determination of a point by the intersection of the two lines. The rod has two targets. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 .rod height<.

O#ti'al )*&$e,

*btain measurements to determine the first point defining the first line. 9ine & Pt( *btain measurements to determine the second point defining the first line. 9ine ( Pt & *btain measurements to determine the first point defining the second line. 9ine ( Pt ( *btain measurements to determine the second point defining the second line.

4ine and C rner
The 9ine and !orner dialog contains data for determination of a point on the corner using one line defined by two points. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. 9ine Pt& *btains measurements to determine the first point defining a line. 9ine Pt *btains measurements to determine the first point defining a line. !orner *btains the hori?ontal angle to locate a point on the line at the corner.

13-5

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

Offsets

4ine and Off'et
The 9ine and *ffset dialog contains data for the determination of a point distant from a line defined by two points. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. The .istance *ffsets field contains the three parameters of the offset= Down= sets the height of the point relatively to the current position. Toward= sets the distance between the current point and the pro@ection of the offset point on the line of sight. -i%.t= sets the distance between the offset point and its pro@ection, ta5ing into consideration its location relative to the line of sight. 9ine Pt& *btains measurements to the first point on the line. 9ine Pt( *btains measurements to the second point on the line.

Plane and C rner
The Plane and !orner dialog helps you to determine a point ;!orner< by a plane defined by three points and an angle measurement. Point Name for the offset point to be stored. !ode !ode for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R

P/N 7010-0492

13-9

O#ti'al )*&$e,

Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. Plane & *btains measurements to determine the first point in a plane. Plane ( *btains measurements to determine the second point in a plane. Plane *btains measurements to determine the third point in a plane. !orner *btain hori?ontal and vertical angle measurements to determine the point in a plane at the corner. Note= Three points defining the plane must not be colinear ;all on the same line<.

A!t

T p

This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allow you to collect points by Time and .istance. To open the Auto Topo dialog, select Survey'QAuto Topo in the Robotic mode. Point .isplays the current point name. !ode .isplays the current point code. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. Attributes and the notes etc can also be set for the point by selecting from the menu ne t to the code. )R The height of the rod ;target<. Start Starts the survey process. After pressing, the button changes the name to $nd. 9og Now 131010
MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el#

Ele$ation @M*lti#leA

Immediately stores the current position. Stop "a5es the total station stop trac5ing the prism and go into FStandbyF mode. Turn *pens the Rotate dialog which allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points. 9oc5 9oc5 onto the prism or Ftrac5F it. Search "a5es the instrument search for the prism. Nloc5 Sends the FNuic5loc5F or FTurn AroundF command which will cause the Total Station to search for the R!'(&.

Ele8ati n ?M!ltiple@
The method of elevation allows you to define the vertical coordinate using the coordinates of two ;or more< 5nown points. Point The 5nown point name. !ode The 5nown pointYs code. )R The height of the rod. "eas Ta5es the sideshot to the point.

P/N 7010-0492

131111

O#ti'al )*&$e,

M!ltiple 6ac9'i$ht
"ultiple bac5sight points allow you to perform more precise measurements. Point The 5nown point name. !ode The 5nown pointYs code. )R The height of the rod. "eas Ta5es the sideshot to the point.

M!lti Set Pa$e
The page contains the data collected during the measurements, grouped by sets ;one set for "ultiple mode contains two measurementsM one set of the Repeat mode contains four measurements<. The columns are= Set= the name of the set -es 0%= .ifference of each )A measurement within the set from the average of all the )AYs in the set -es 7%= .ifference of each CA measurement within the set from the average of all the CAYs in the set -es S,= .ifference of each S. measurement within the set from the average of all the S.Ys in the set 0%= )ori?ontal Angle measurement within the corresponding set 7%= Certical Angle measurement within the corresponding set S,= Slope .istance measurement within the corresponding set Remove .eletes all measurements from the set. Accept 131212
MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el#

Fin )tation

Saves the measured point. Add 0rings you to the sideshot page to measure a new set of angles.

Find Stati n
The "easurement tab of the %ind Station dialog is used for the identification of the station by computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the pro@ection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from the center line of the road. Road Type the name for the road, or select it from the list. Point The name of the point to %ind Station to store after ta5ing a measurement. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. )R Sets the target height above the mar5 ;rod height<. 0S Setup *pens the 0ac5sight Survey dialog for setting the bac5sight point. The information displayed is the same as has been entered. Pt Stn !omputes the offsets of the selected point. !ur Stn Ta5es a shot to the point and computes and displays the offsets. "eas Ta5es a shot to the point, stores it and computes and displays the offsets in the Results tab.

P/N 7010-0492

131313

O#ti'al )*&$e,

Mi''in$ 4ine
The "issing 9ine dialog emulates the total station measurement from one point to another and stores the result to the Raw .ata database. The Start and $nd points can be entered manually, chosen from the map or from the list, or measured through the "eas button.

Tape 2i/en'i n
The Tape .im tab contains the settings for performing the survey. Point The name of the ne t point in the survey. !ode The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. .ist 9eft>.ist Right Toggles between .ist 9eft and .ist Right values. These set the direction of the ne t movement, relative to the previous direction. The field below sets the distance to move. Accept Applies the taped distance to the perimeter line. %inish *pens the floating menu of two items= Close #oly%on" connects the first and the last two points with a line. Calc Closure" calculates the difference between the last and the first points.

1eference 4ine
The Tape .imension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of structures, such as buildings, that have features perpendicular to each other. This is done using tape measurements, relative to the two

131414

MAGNET Fiel

1!0 "el#

irect>Reverse . Start Pt !ontains the properties of the starting point= the name . Also the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button. !ur Sta Ta5es a shot of the point and computes and displays the offsets. CSect"2irectA1e8er'e The A'Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line.wall of the building<.ialog.can be entered manually. The points are surveyed similar to the *bservations from the Sideshot'. If the road has not been set. or chosen from the map or list< and code. P/N 7010-0492 131010 . you should define the plane.irect The A'Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another in a plane perpendicular to the center line. or chosen from the map or list< and code. If the road has not been set. you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the *bservations from the Sideshot'. $nd Pt !ontains the properties of the ending point= the name . ASect'.ialog. !ur Sta Ta5es a shot of the point and computes and displays the offsets. The Ref 9ine tab contains information about the two points comprising the reference line. forming the reference line.can be entered manually.>)e't-9i&e't/7e$e&se 5nown points that belong to one side of the structure . Also the point can be measured by pressing the "eas button.irect .

height of rod or target<. choosing from the map or the list.isplays the current point code. 131111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Point . insert the )R value . 1e/ te Scannin$ This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allows you to scan with Robotic Total Stations. Plunge TS Press to plunge the instrument .)ori?ontal. Rotate to Point Select a point by typing its name. Certical or Inclined< in which to scan. This can be chosen from the map or drop'down list. select Survey'QScanning in the Robotic mode. and press the Turn button. Attributes and the notes etc can also be set for the point by selecting from the menu ne t to the code.isplays the name of the point. Turn Sends the data to the total station. To open the Scanning dialog. !ode .O#ti'al )*&$e.rotate the telescope and the body by &48 degrees<. *rientation Selects the type of plane . The code can be entered manually or chosen from the drop'down list. 1e/ te 1 tate The Rotate dialog contains the settings of the remote total station rotation. Rotation Angles Sets the values of the hori?ontal and vertical rotation angles.

the !amera information will be selected automaticallyM otherwise.@pg file e tension.< Ciew *pens the Ciew Scan dialog. Select a previous Image or browse for a new one . 0ac5 Returns to the previous dialog. Scannin$ In the Scanning dialog select a desired scan type= either Scan with Image or Scan w>o Image. Image Sets an Image file.ob.P$# with the U.cmr e tension. 0ac5 *pens the first set of options for Remote Scanning.Images are stored as .isplays the distance between points. Select Scan The Select Scan dialog displays the settings for a scan session.< !amera Sets the !amera information.7e+ote )'annin. )ori?ontal or Incline. select a previous !amera or browse for a new one .!ameras are stored as a te t file with the U. Session Sets a Session name. If the Image e ists in the . Ne t *pens another Scanning dialog to set spacing and start scanning. Ne t P/N 7010-0492 131717 . If Scan w>o Image is selected. select the *rientation of the scan ' Certical. Spacing .

$.O#ti'al )*&$e. The position of the crosshair can be ad@usted. or measure a new point. Remove Removes the selected point to ad@ust the orientation calculation. ?oom out. If four points still remain."eas. tap on the image in a rough area of where the orientation point is located. and to switche on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. Tap on 5rientation Pt= first. There are buttons to ?oom in. Die= Scan The Ciew Scan dialog displays the image along with orientation and scanned points for completed scan sessions. Accept !ontinues to the Scanning dialog to select areas for scanning. clic5ing the button opens the *rient dialog. *nce all fields are filled. %rom "ap. %rom 9ist<. E coordinates. !alc Bhen a minimum of four orientation points are established. the new results are displayed. Orientati n The *rient dialog associates a position on the image . Select or meas 5rient Pt= select a 5nown point from the Point 9ist or "ap. The bitmap ne t to the "eas button displays the menu of three items . . If there are less 131515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Orientati n 1e'!lt' The *rient Res dialog displays the results of the image orientation. clic5ing the button computes the image orientation and displays the results. y< with 5nown N. The image will ?oom to this point and show a crosshair. display the whole image.

the area is set. !oarse<. Press the stylus near the first verte to close the area. !lear $rases all drawn areas. than four orientation points. Scan As the total station measures points within the predefined area.%ine. pressing the button begins the scan. Bhen the stylus is lifted. Start Point P/N 7010-0492 131919 . Start Bhen the areas are set. . 9ines will be drawn connecting each verte to the previous one. (. then the *rientation Results dialog will close automatically to continue the orientation procedure. each point will be displayed on the image.raw a polygon by pressing the stylus down at each verte . The main use is to set the instrument to FNon'PrismF mode which is reOuired for scanning and also to change the measurement mode . Scan To select one or more areas for scanning. Inter8al The Interval dialog sets the starting point and hori?ontal and vertical intervals for scanning. ta5e either of the following two ways= &. Stop Immediately stops the scan. The Interval dialog opens so you can set the scanning parameters.7e+ote )'annin. . Settings *pens the "ode dialog.raw a rectangle by pressing the stylus on the dialog for the start point and dragging to the end point.

Interval $nters the scanning intervals either as Angle or number of points. the $stimate Time dialog displays the scanning information including the total number of points to be scanned and an estimate of the time it will ta5e to complete the scan. clic5 !ancel and enter larger intervals. If the estimated time is too long. Points The point name. The "onitor dialog is used to control the monitor survey. )A )ori?ontal interval. 132020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . The output format and destination is accessed from the "onitor *ptions dialog when configuring the total station. Interval Interval listed as the !ycle Time. *ptionally. CA Certical interval. The measurements are recorded into the raw data file. the total station will rotate to the ne t point in the seOuence. The starting point name.O#ti'al )*&$e. E'ti/ate Ti/e 0efore scanning begins. the raw measurements or the computed points can be outputted to a file or communication port in either the %!'1 or #TS' 3 formats. !lic5 *6 to begin scanning points. M nit r The "onitor function measures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms. If a prism cannot be found after a period of &/ seconds.

Start Initiates the seOuence of measurements. Turn *pens the Rotate dialog that allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points.Monito& Auto If the Auto combobo is set to *N. Stop "a5es the total station stop trac5ing the prism and go into YStandbyY mode. even if the measurements ta5e longer than the cycle time. the total station automatically rotates to the ne t point in the seOuence and records a measurement. The . but allows you to verify or correct the centering to the prism prior to ta5ing a measurement. There are four types= ' no data ' Ouerying status ' turning M nit r Opti n' 9og To P/N 7010-0492 132121 . The monitor function will always complete the entire seOuence. the total station rotates to the point. Search "a5e the instrument search for the prism. which repeats at the desired interval.ata Indicator above the Nloc5 button shows the current state of the robotic Total Station. 9oc5 9oc5 onto the prism or Ytrac5Y it. If it is set to *%%. Nloc5 Sends the YNuic5loc5Y or YTurn AroundY command that will cause the Total Station to search for the R!'(&.

data and stop bits settings for the comm port. %ile. The 2p and .own arrows to the left of 9ist of points allows you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points. only ##A format is available. *utput %ormat %or -aw Data. enter the name and location of the file to log to. they are stored as normal points. enter the baud rate. 9ist of Points The list of currently selected points.O#ti'al )*&$e. parity. Point 9ist The pre'e isting points list. or communication ports. select from the following= *utput Type Select whether to output -aw Data or Coordinates. %ile Name If 9og To %ile is chosen. %!'1>#TS'3 or #TS'1 format. the measurements are stored as !hec5 Points to the original points in the monitor listM otherwise. select whether to output %!'/. Select from options None. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that 132222 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . %or Coordinates. !omm Settings If a serial !*" port is selected. !an be chosen from the list or entered manually. Store As !hec5 Point Bhen chec5ed. M nit r P intli't The "onitor Point 9ist dialog allows you to monitor points and create a point list to monitor. If 9og To %ile or a communication port is chosen.

Ne t *pens the Survey dialog to monitor.Monito& duplicate the arrows on the dialog. The A symbol deletes the highlighted point from the list.target< height. P/N 7010-0492 132323 . )R The rod . The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list.

Notes2 132424 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .O#ti'al )*&$e.

4e8el 1!n This dialog displays information regarding the . Crteate 4e8el 1!n $nter information needed to create a 9evel Run. list or enter the name. Point Id Iou can select the point from the map.igital 9evel Run in progress.isplay Settings on the top left menu. The items to be displayed and the order of items to be displayed can be selected by clic5ing .C-a#te& 14 . 0S !lic5 on 0S to ta5e a 0ac5sight shot. %S !lic5 on %S to ta5e a %oresight measurement.e$el )*&$e. Name $nter a name for the 9evel Run. Show Sum0S'Sum%S P/N 7010-0492 14-1 . SS !lic5 on SS to ta5e a Sideshot measurement. Note $nter a description for the 9evel Run. !ode Iou can enter the code for the point to be measured.

"eas !lic5 "eas to ta5e a shot. "eas Ta5es a measurement to the SS point and displays the elevation and cut>fill values. . !lic5 *5 to save the measurement to the 9evel Run. The )eight of Instrument is also displayed. then the Sum0S'Sum%S will be displayed below the 9evel Run information. T= Pe$ Te't The Two peg test dialog guides you through a series of measurements to help determine any error in the line of sight through the level when the bubble is centered. *n the dialog is displayed the 0S Point . If this option is turned on . then to Peg(. "ove the instrument to one of the pegs and then ta5e the shots again to Pegs & and (.Top 9eft "enu<. Also displayed are the rod ht and the hori?ontal distance for the 0S and SS points. !enter yourself between the two points to measure and ta5e a measurement to Peg&. !ancel Ouits the dialog without saving the value. The results are displayed. "eas !lic5 "eas to ta5e the measurement for the displayed prompted Peg.. Iou have the option to select a different SS point from the map or list. Sta9e SS This dialog helps you to sta5e an SS point for the level run.e$el )*&$e. Sh t' #uides you through the sets needed to be ta5en for the measurement.already measured< and the SS point.

The dialog displays all the shots ta5en and the computed error. .T4o Pe. The order of the columns to be displayed can be changed by selecting the display column and clic5ing the up and down arrow. This measurement is not used in the error computations. T= Pe$ Te't 1e'!lt' The results of the Two Peg testing appear on this dialog after all measurements are ta5en. Settin$' Select the columns to be displayed for a level run from this dialog. Test 9ocate Peg( "easures the hori?ontal distance to Peg( and compares it with the already ta5en measurement to Peg&.

e$el )*&$e. Notes2 14-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ..

9evel< Sta5es design points with 5nown elevation. Sta9e f lder Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9: Points #PS Points *ptical .irection Sta5es a point using a 5nown point. Surface There are three types of Sta5e Surface= $levation. and Spiral.Total Station< Points *ptical . $levation *nly for *ptical 9evel mode.T". you can sta5e a 9ine.Total Station< . and . !urve. P/N 7010-0492 10-0 . the a?imuth.Pt !urve. Point in . 9ines #PS 9ines *ptical .C-a#te& 10 )ta6in. and the offsets from the a?imuth line. Sta5es the elevation of a point. Intersection.etermines points along desired lines formed by design points. Road. . *ffsets Bith offsets.

9inewor5 Sta5es points on a linewor5 selected either by !odeString. or from the map.)ta6in. Road Sta5es points on a road. This can also be chosen from the map. Point 9ist *ptical . the list. from a linewor5 list. Slope Sta5es points near a slope on the desired alignment. !urve Sta5es points along a hori?ontal curve.esign Point $nter the point to sta5eout. Antenna )t . . Real'Time Road Sta5es points on a road in real time. Sta9e P int The Sta5eout Point dialog contains the initial data for the point sta5eout. Point 9ist Sta5es points in a point list.9evel< Sta5es the listDP-7Ms design points to determine the elevation and compute a cut>fill value at every point in the list. !ode $nter the code for the design point. or a new point.for #PS< 10-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

the design point for sta5eout is a PT9 point. 0.only for the Robotic mode<= opens the Remote !ontrol dialog E&it Points= opens the Points dialog PT9 )o&e= if chec5ed. assisting the sta5eout process. Sta9e p p"!p /en! Status= opens the Status dialog Con$ig -a&io= opens the !onfigure Radio dialog 2S Setup= opens the 0S dialog Con$ig 9in3 . clic5 the Ant )t button. P/N 7010-0492 10-3 . Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog..for TS< $nter the reflector height. the value of the antenna height. To do this.)ta6e 9.. The %rom .only for the Robotic mode<= opens the !onfigure 9in5 dialog-emote Control . In+erse= opens the Two'Point Inverse dialog 7ie' -eport= opens the current report Chats>Create "e'= opens the !hat dialog Sta9e 24 P int Select the 0S Point and . Sta5e Report Shows the name of the current sta5e report if it is set. Point Shows the default height of the antenna reference point . Iou can edit the antenna type.ARP< above the mar5. and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog.esign point to sta5e. "ore.ob list will display only the @ob points having PT9 coordinates for selection.. he icon on the upper'left corner brings up the pop'up menu of additional options. and select $dit.

)t !omp The type of height computations to use for the sta5eout point. or the a?imuth.height of starting point<= The sta5eout point will have the same height as the starting point of the line. the value of the antenna height.)ta6in. clic5 the Ant )t button. and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog. To do this. This can be one of the following= 0t o! Start #t . 0S Point Select the 0S point to be used for the bac5sight measurement. Sta5eout .irects you to the Sta5e dialog to sta5e the design point.ARP< above the mar5. . $nd Point>A?imuth Sets the direction of the reference line by either specifying another point.. 0. 0S Ta5es the 0S measurement.for #PS< Shows the height of the antenna reference point . Sta9e 4ine The Sta5e 9ine dialog contains the initial data for the line sta5eout.esign Point Select the point to sta5e. Iou can edit the antenna type. Start Point Sets the starting point of the reference line. and select $dit. 8nterpolate 0t= The height of the sta5eout point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line.for TS< 10-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Antenna )t .

Sta9e The Sta5e dialog is designed to assist in the sta5eout process. The sta5e dialog contains a number of fle ible features which allow you to tailor and customi?e your sta5ing reOuirements. -ea&ing 2utton . This information can be displayed or hidden by pressing the arrow button on the left of the dialog. Bith the e ception of the data view there are also four selectable data fields to display specific sta5eout information. . Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog.for TS<: The read button located to the right of the arrow buttons is used to ma5e an observation. Sta5eout Panel The Sta5eout Panel along the bottom of the dialog displays a number of buttons used to provide information and facilitate sta5ing.epending on the current sta5ing application there are a number of different view options which provide different graphical aids for sta5ing. sta5e panel along the bottom and a view. Pressing the button will display a popup list detailing the design point information. . Pressing the buttons will advance forward and bac5ward through the different design locations. assisting the sta5eout process. Instrument Panel The Instrument panel along the top of the dialog displays #PS> *ptical instrument specific iconic information. P/N 7010-0492 10-0 .esign 2utton: The design button on the left provides the information on the current design point.)ta6e $nter the reflector height. The main dialog consists of an instrument panel along the top. %rro' 2uttons: The arrow buttons to the right of the design button are displayed if the sta5ing application permits multiple point locations.

m. As soon as the target becomes closer than the )ori?ontal . 2ata Field' All views e cept the .ata view is accessible on all sta5eout modules. To access the different views press and hold on the sta5e dialog until the view popup appears for a new selection.ata view always contains all the available data fields. The .)ta6in. the graphic shows the target point in the center and the current location. This view provides a directional way of locating the design locations. Store 2utton: The storage button located to the far right is used to save the current sta5ed observation. such as ?oom. Die=' $ach of the sta5ing modules has a number of different views to provide different aspects to help the sta5ing process. Map Die= The "ap view is also accessible on all sta5eout modules.ata view have four selectable data fields used to display specific sta5ing information. N r/al Die= The Normal view is available whenever you are sta5ing 5nown design coordinates. To change one of these data fields simply press on the field and select from a list of all the available fields for the current sta5e module. a blue arrow will point to the target direction with the current location in the center of the dialog. Bhen sta5ing in the map view the bac5ground image of the sta5eout is the @obYs map. 2ata Die= The .ata view provides a detailed list of all data fields available for the current sta5ing module.istance 10-1 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls. If the distance to the target is less that m. If the distance to the design is more than . The .

Store Stores the last measured sta5e point.T". Dertical Off'et 24 Certical *ffset P/N 7010-0492 10-7 . O8erhead Die= The *verhead view is also available whenever you are sta5ing 5nown design coordinates. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls. This view shows the current sta5e location in a vertical display as well as the road cross section. S!rface Die= The Surface view is available when sta5ing . The Point to Sta5e or $levation to Sta5e. Tolerance value the graphic shows a bullYs'eye target point on the dialog. Also displayed is the height of the instrument. such as ?oom. Sta9e !t 24 This dialog helps you sta5e a Point or $levation. Cr '' Secti n Die= The !ross Section view is available when sta5ing roads. "eas Ta5es a measurement to the Rod and displays the elevation and cut> fill values. A map menu panel is available which provides the map controls. This view is similar to a map view and shows the current location and design location. This view shows the surface and current sta5e location. *n the dialog is displayed the 0S Point . such as ?oom.)ta6eo*t 9.already measured<.

-Pt !urve !reates a curve to sta5eout by selecting three points. Sta9e Off'et' Clic9 an ic n t perf r/ the ta'9: 9ine Sta5es a line with offsets in the )ori?ontal and Certical directions. or the the $nd Point of the line. $nter the Certical *ffset for the measurement. )t !omp 10-5 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .)ta6in. !urve Sta5es a curve . Start Point The starting point of the line. Intersection Sta5es the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets. $nd Point>A?imuth The direction of the line set through either the a?imuth of the line or the ending point of the line. the a?imuth to another point. Spiral Sta5es points at specified )ori?ontal and Certical offsets with respect to a specified spiral. Sta9e 4ine E Off'et' Perform a sta5eout of a line with offsets in the )ori?ontal and Certical directions. The line is defined by the a?imuth.section of an arc< at a specified hori?ontal and vertical offset from the curve.

Start Sta The starting station . Selections to include= 0or1 en& point: The node point between hori?ontal segments. 7ert high point: The highest vertical point. Ne t *pens the Station D *ffsets screen.This is unavailable when the direction of the line is set through a?imuth.)ta6e Offsets The type of height computations for the sta5eout point= 0t o$ Start Pt .indicates the sta5eout of four points by subdividing the line into three eOual segments. 0or1 angle point: The hori?ontal angle point. 7ert en& point: The node point between vertical segments. Include Transition Point !hec5 mar5 and enable if the transition point should be included in spite of the station distance..height of starting point<= the sta5eout point has the same height as the starting point of the line. "ore. Interpolate 0t= the height of the sta5eout point will be computed through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and ending points of the line . 0or1 -a&ius point: The hori?ontal radius point ' Center point. P/N 7010-0492 10-9 .. Tran'iti n P int' The Transition Points dialog allows you to select which available transition points are to be included in the sta5eout. 0or1 mi&point on cur+e: The middle point of a hori?ontal curve. 0or1 intersect: )ori?ontal intersection of start and end tangent.chainage< of the line. %or instance. used only in combination with 0or1 end point.< Num Subs The number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the line. a value of .

Station>Real'Time button The Station>Real'Time button allows you to toggle between sta5ing 5nown and un5nown sta5ing locations. Interval The station interval. Intersection & Offsets / 4ine 1 The Intersection D *ffsets dialog enables you to sta5eout out the intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified offsets. enter the starting station location. 7ert lo' point: The lowest vertical point.9ine &< and the offset of the first parallel line. "ore.)ta6in..own The 2p or . The second dialog field enables you to define another line .9ine (< and the offset of the second parallel line. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left hori?ontal offset to be applied.. Sta5e Starts the sta5eout module for the designated offset locations. 0ac5 Returns to the previous initiali?ation dialog.own )eight offset to be applied. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station by the specified interval. This dialog contains the parameters of the first line= %rom Point 101010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . 2p>. %or station. The first dialog defines one line . Stati n E Off'et The Station D *ffset dialog allows you to define parameters for sta5ing offset locations. The intersection point of these two parallel lines defines the sta5eout point.

The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first point chosen. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line. Intersect )t The height of the intersection point. A? to Pt>A?imuth The direction of the line. It can be set through the a?imuth of the line or the a?imuth from the start point to the point selected. A? to Pt>A?imuth The direction of the line. Iou can manually enter. a?imuth from the start point to the point selected. Right *ffset>9eft *ffset The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line.)ta6e Offsets Starting point of the 9ine &. Inter'ecti n E Off'et' A 4ine # This dialog contains the parameters of the second line= %rom Point Starting point of the 9ine (. or select from the list or map the following P/N 7010-0492 101111 . Three Pt C!r8e Iou can create a curve to sta5eout by selecting three points. It can be set through the a?imuth of the line. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog.in the #PS: case<>)R . Antenna .in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod . Store Point The name of the intersection point.target< height.

!urve Specify whether to use the Small or 9arger curve. P! Point The Point of !urve. P! Point The Point of !urve.Small curve< and the other with delta greater than or eOual to &48 degrees . The radius.9arge curve<. Calues of Small or 9arge can be selected from the Cur+e drop'down bo to indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations. the starting point of the arc. the starting point of the arc. Cur+e Point. or -P Point. SS Specify the Start Station. 101212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Ne t *pens the Station D *ffsets screen. !urve Point Any point on the curve. Sta9e C!r8e E Off'et' The !urve D *ffsets dialog function enables you to sta5eout a curve . In the second case the distance between -P Point and PC point should be eOual to the distance between -P Point and PT point. sets of points= PC Point. PT Point.section of an arc< at a specified hori?ontal and vertical offset from the curve. RP Point Radius Point for the curve. and the P! and PT points define two curves ' one with delta less than or eOual to &48 degrees . PC Point. PT Point The Point of tangent to the curve.)ta6in. PT Point.

This is the starting point of the spiral.eg !hord The radius parameters of the curve. . TS Point Tangent to Spiral point. Tangent A?i The a?imuth of the tangent to the spiral at the point TS.chainage< of the line. SS The starting station . Sta9e Spiral E Off'et The Sta5e Spiral D *ffset dialog is used to sta5eout points at specified )ori?ontal and Certical offsets with respect to a specified spiral.ir The direction of FmovingF= TS 'Q S! c TangentSpiral'QSpiral !ircle. Radius> . 9ength>!hord>Tangent>"id *rd>$ tern>.)ta6e Offsets Tangent A?i The a?imuth of the Tangent of the curve . or the Spiral !onstant.elta Is the length parameter of the curve.arc< at the P! point.eg !urve The radius parameter of the spiral at the ending point. 9ength>Sp !onst The length of the spiral at the ending point. !S 'Q ST c !ircle Spiral'Q Spiral Tangent. Turn Specifies whether the spiral turns right or left.eg !urve> . the constant of the spiral.eg !hord>. P/N 7010-0492 101313 . This is the incoming spiral to the internal circle. Radius>. This is the outgoing spiral from the circle to the Tangent.

Sta9e S!rface Sta5e Surface enables you to sta5e a surface as a 5nown fi ed elevation.T". d $nter the elevation value in the editable field.field . clic5 the list selection or map selection the list or the map.chainage< of the line.T" created from !reate Surface is saved as TIN file. chec5 the Create Sur!ace bo . !lic5 on the !reate TIN dialog to start the sta5eout. or .)ta6in. chec5 the Use Ali%nment bo . 0y default it will be newT8N'TN@.in the #PS: case< > the reflector . Road. Sta9e S!rface Ele8ati n To sta5e a surface of a fi ed elevation= d Select Elevation by clic5ing the selection button. !lic5 Ne t to specify the name for a new file.in *ptical mode< d !lic5 Sta3e to start sta5eout. Select one of three types of Sta5e Surface as reOuired= $levation. d If reOuired. The 2se Alignment option enables you to use an e isting alignment to report stations 101414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . button and select the point from d $nter the #PS antenna height in the Ant 0t editable field . A Cut)Fill or Elevation model can be generated from .target< height in the 0. To set the elevation of a desired point as a fi ed elevation.or more sta5ed points. SS The starting station . d If reOuired. The .

select the current method of selection of data reOuired to create the boundary. press either the "ap selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the map P/N 7010-0492 101010 ..polygon< from 5nown points. In the Points>Point 9ist>9ine'or3>%rea field.. "ore. chec5 the De!ine Boundary bo . !lic5 Ne t to select the name of the alignment.. d If reOuired. "ore. The list name will appear in the edit field.. d %or Point 9ist.. "ore. The . d By -an%e ' points from a range. d From Map ' points selected graphically from the map "ore. in the Select Pts drop'down list. d From /ist ' points from a list of points.. "ore. choose an option to select multiple points in the @ob for creating the boundary= d All ' all the @ob points..efine 0oundary option enables you to specify a boundary . d %or 9ine'or3 and %rea.. d 0y /ayer ' points on a selected layer... !lic5 on the Roads dialog to start the sta5eout..)ta6e )*&fa'e Ele$ation and offsets. !lic5 Ne t to do this in the Surface 0oundary dialog. To define a surface boundary= &.. d By -adius ' points around a selected point at a certain distance. "ore. d By Code ' points of a selected code.... press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting point list in the @ob. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button. d %or Points. "ore.. S!rface 6 !ndar. "ore. d By Code Strin% ' points of a selected code string.

in *ptical mode<. d !lic5 Sta3e to start the sta5eout.T"= d Select DTM by clic5ing the selection button...T" created from !reate Surface is saved as a TIN file. and select the name of the d $nter the #PS antenna height in the Ant 0t editable field .field .more. d If reOuired.. The name can also be manually entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the o5 button. 0y default it will be newT8N'TN@. . Icons you can use "A#N$T %ield general buttons and icons are described here.< or press the 9ist selection button and select an e isting linewor5>area from the list .<. Sta9e S!rface 1 ad To sta5e a surface of an e isting Road= d Select -oad by clic5ing the selection button. The .. The list will display the points currently selected.target< height in the 0. 101111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . The name will appear in the edit field. A Cut)Fill or Elevation model can be generated from . chec5 the Create Sur!ace bo . on the !reate TIN dialog to start the Sta9e 2TM To sta5e a surface of an e isting . (. d !lic5 the list selection button road from the list. !lic5 the button sta5eout. !lic5 Ne t to specify the name for a new file. and the plot will display the created surface boundary..more..in the #PS: case< > the reflector .)ta6in.or more sta5ed points.

!lic5 on the Roads dialog to start the sta5eout.in *ptical mode<. !reated The date and time the selected . "ore..)ta6e 9TM d !lic5 the list selection button dis5. d If reOuired. d !lic5 Sta3e to start sta5eout.or more sta5ed points.T" was last modified.T" created from !reate Surface is saved as a TIN file.T" was created.T" not listed in the above list. !lic5 Ne t to select the name of the alignment.field .T" 9ist 9ist of available . Open 2TM !urrent .T" The currently selected . . chec5 the Use Ali%nment bo ..T".target< height in the 0. and select the . A Cut)Fill or Elevation model can be generated from . The . 0y default it will be newT8N'TN@. 0rowse !lic5 on 0rowse to select a .in the #PS: case< > the reflector . d If reOuired. !lic5 Ne t to specify the name for a new file. The 2se Alignment option enables you to use an e isting alignment to report stations and offsets.T"s. P/N 7010-0492 101717 . !lic5 on the !reate TIN dialog to start the sta5eout. chec5 the Create Sur!ace bo .T" in the d $nter the #PS antenna height in the Ant 0t editable field . "odified The date and time the selected .

target< height. )? . Angle *ffset The angle offset from the a?imuth line. Ant )t . %rom Point The starting point. or select it from the list or from the map. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog to perform the sta5eout. 101515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . using the 5nown point.in the *ptical mode< The #PS antenna height>The reflector .)ta6in. *pen *pen the selected . the a?imuth.ist The height offset.T". A?imuth>A? to Pt The a?imuth can be set by value. and the offsets from the a?imuth line. Store Pt !hec5 this field if it is desired to store the computed point to the data set.in the #PS: case< > )R .irection dialog enables you to perform the sta5eout of a point.ist The distance offset along the angle offset line. or as the direction to another 5nown point. Cert . Sta9e P int in 2irecti n The Sta5e Point in . Type the name manually.

Reverse *rder !hec5 to perform a sta5eout starting in reverse oder from the end of the Point 9ist. Antenna )t .target< height. and sta5eout in direct or reverse order. 0S Point Select the 0S point to be used for the bac5sight measurement. This can be chosen from the list or entered manually. and sta5eout in direct or reverse order. Point 9ist P/N 7010-0492 101919 . Sta9e 24 P int 4i't The Sta5eout Point 9ist dialog enables you to sta5eout e isting points. The 2p and .own arrows to the left of 9ist of points enables you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.)ta6e Point . The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog.ist Sta9e P int 4i't The Sta5e Point 9ist dialog enables you to sta5eout e isting points. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between the point list and the plot with the point list. Point 9ist The pre'e isting points list.in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod .in the #PS: case< > )R . 9ist of Points The list of currently selected points. select the staring sta5eout point. create a point list to sta5eout. select the staring sta5eout point. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog.

0S Ta5es the 0S measurement. 9ist of Points The list of currently selected points.own arrows to the left of 9ist of points enables you to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points. Sta9e !t Ele8ati n The Sta5eout $levation dialog enables you to sta5eout a given elevation. 0S Ta5es the 0S measurement. Sta5eout *pens the Sta5eout dialog. Select or enter the name of a point list to sta5e. The arrows symbol switches on>off the 5eyboard arrow 5eys that duplicate the arrows on the dialog. 102020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . $levation Select or enter the name of a point list to sta5e. Sta5eout *pens the Sta5eout dialog. The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between display of the point list and the plot with the point list. Sta5eout in Reverse *rder !hec5 to perform a sta5eout starting from the end of the Point 9ist. 0S Point Select the 0S point to be used for the bac5sight measurement. The 2p and .)ta6in.

the starting point of the arc. P! Point The Point of !urve.in the *ptical mode< The #PS antenna height>The reflector .)ta6e C*&$e Sta9e C!r8e This dialog enables you to sta5e a curve . PT Point The Point of Tangency. !urve . The dialog displays the plan of the selection. Radius> .section of an arc< by specifying two points. Sta9e 1eal"Ti/e 1 ad The Real'Time Road dialog enables you to select the road > hori?ontal and vertical alignment for sta5e in real time. Start Sta The starting point of the sta5eout. the distance from the beginning of the road.eg !hord The radius parameters of the curve. Ant )t . Turn Specifies the direction of the arc. the ending point of the arc. This can be entered manually or chosen from the list.target< height. Ne t P/N 7010-0492 102121 .etermines if the smaller or larger part of the arc between the points is used. Road > ) Alnt > )C Alnt The road > hori?ontal and vertical alignment to be sta5ed.eg !urve> .in the #PS: case< > )R .

Ne t *pens the Sta5e Alignment dialog. the distance from the beginning of the road. 102222 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Template Slopes Select this radio button to apply the template cut>fill slope values. Road The road to be sta5ed.in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod .)ta6in. and enables you to edit the cut>fill slope values. Stake Road (Slope) This dialog shows cut>fill for template slopes. "ore. Sta9e 1 ad The Sta5e Road dialog enables you to select the road for sta5eout and displays the plan of the chosen road.. *pens the St5 Road dialog. This can be entered manually or chosen from the list.. Include transition point Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition points you wish to include. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog to perform the sta5eout. Start Sta The starting point of the sta5eout.target< height. $nter Slopes Select this radio button and enter the cut>fill slope values as reOuired. Antenna .in the #PS: case<>)R .

The arrow buttons in this field move the current segment point along the cross section. Segment Pt The point code of the current segment. Right>9eft *ffset The hori?ontal offset from the current segment point. 2p>. This will reflect on the scheme in the bottom of this dialog.n+ent Sta9e 1 ad Ali$n/ent The Sta5e Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross section on the sta5eout station and helps you sta5eout of all of the desired points. P/N 7010-0492 102323 . The arrow buttons change the station number by the value of Station Interval. d Se%ment= the hori?ontal offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the centerline.)ta6e 7oa Ali. %rom the drop'down list= d Specify offsets location d Centerline= both the hori?ontal and vertical offset starts at the centerline. d 8ntersect -i%. Stn Interval The interval of the station increment. d 8ntersect /e!t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the left segment with the cross'section. Station The station where the sta5eout is performed.own *ffset The vertical offset from the current segment point.t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the right segment with the cross'section.

.)ta6in. d Sur!ace /e!t= the hori?ontal left offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset.t= the hori?ontal right offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset. This can be entered manually or chosen from the list.. the distance from the beginning of the road. Sta9e Sl pe Ali$n/ent The Sta5e Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross section at the sta5eout station and helps you sta5eout the catch point .in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod . Sta9e Sl pe The Sta5e Slope dialog enables you to select the road for sta5eout and displays the plan of the chosen road. Antenna . d Sur!ace -i%. Ne t *pens the St5 Road dialog.target< height.in the #PS: case<>)R . "ore. Ne t *pens the Sta5e Alignment dialog. Include transition point Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition points you wish to include. Start Sta The starting point of the sta5eout.the point where the slope crosses the surface of the terrain< and>or 102424 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Road The road to be sta5ed.

the offset of the catch point.n+ent P/N 7010-0492 102020 . )ta6e 7oa Ali.

d Sur!ace -i%.t= the hori?ontal right offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset.t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the right segment with the cross'section. The arrow buttons change the station number by the value of Station Interval.)ta6in. )inge Point The hinge point code. The hinge point is a point of rotation of the !ut> %ill Slopes. %rom the drop'down list= Specify offsets location d Centerline= both the hori?ontal and vertical offset starts at the centerline. Stn Interval The interval of the station increment. d Sur!ace /e!t= the hori?ontal left offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the hori?ontal offset. d Se%ment= the hori?ontal offset starts at the beginning of the segmentM the vertical offset starts at the centerline. Ne t *pens the St5 Slope dialog. The arrow buttons in this field move the hinge point along the cross section. Station The station where the sta5eout is performed. This will reflect on the scheme in the bottom of this dialog. 102121 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . d 8ntersect /e!t= the vertical offset starts at the segment pointM the hori?ontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line parallel to the left segment with the cross'section. d 8ntersect -i%.

Right *ffset>9eft *ffset P/N 7010-0492 102727 . "ore.in the #PS: case<>)R .. update the list of linewor5s and select it in the list.in the *ptical mode< The antenna height>The rod . 9ine'or3 > Co&e toggles through two linewor5 selections= d Code= allows linewor5 selection by !odeString. If the line is a bac5ground line. Station The station along the line being sta5ed..listed in the dialog< or a polyline selected from the "ap.)ta6e )lo#e Sta9e 4ine= r9 To start a linewor5 sta5e. Include transition point Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow you to select which transition points you wish to include. Stn Interval The station sta5ing interval. SS The starting point of the sta5eout. The two arrows to the right enable you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the Stn Interval shown in the ne t line. the distance from the beginning of the linewor5. d /inewor3= allows linewor5 selection from the @ob linewor5s . Antenna . select Sta5e > 9inewor5 menu. Ne t *pens the Station D *ffsets dialog. copy the line to the @ob. Stati n E Off'et' The Station D *ffsets dialog contains the settings for the sta5eout session.target< height.

The right or left offset of the sta5eout point with respect to the line at the station shown on the Station field.bac5< segment before the angle point.own )eight offset with respect to the height of the line at the station. d M&C= the point in the middle of the curve. 2p>.d= the sta5e location will be on the . 2e'i$n Off'et' The )eight dialog is available in the Sta5eout Point and Sta5eout Point9ist in the upper'left menu by selecting Set Ellipsoi&al ht. Sta5e *pens the Sta5e dialog to perform the sta5eout.own The 2p or .ahead< segment after the angle point. Angle Pts This option enables you to sta5e one of the three possible offset locations when they sta5eout to an angle point= d &!!set B3= the sta5e location will be on the . d -#= the radius point. d #8= the point of intersection of tangents to the curve drawn at the start and end curve points.)ta6in. the proposed sta5e location will be on the bisectri of the angle at the computed offset from the angle point. !urve Pts This option enables you to sta5e one of the four possible locations when they sta5eout to a curve point= d &!!set= the sta5e location will be on the curve at the offset distance from the curve point. d Bisector= when bisector is selected. Set 102525 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . d &!!set A.

for e ample roads<. the corresponding label to each point. !ode P/N 7010-0492 102929 . Initial P int Na/e The Initial Point Name dialog enables you to specify the starting name for the points calculated for the sta5eout tas5.T" selected to be sta5ed and enter the offset value to be used. graphically displayed with all points shown with chec5 mar5s. and lines connecting the points. Road *ffset !hec5 the control to apply the Road *ffset to the height of the point to be sta5ed and enter the offset value to be used. or Set 8 depending on the coord. $ach point and line is selectable and will be mar5ed with a green color if selected.)ta6e . All selections can be cleared through= Remove selected Removes all selected references.T" *ffset for the .esign )eight>$levation !hec5 the control to apply the . sys. The dialog displays the current cross section. The dialog enables you to change the height of the current point. %irst Point The name of the first point. .ine4o&6 Ele+ation. .T" *ffset !hec5 the control to apply the . Set 1eference' A S!rface and P int 1eference' This dialog is accessible through the the Sta5eout Ciews and the Store Point dialog when the type of sta5ing uses cross sections . and display type.esign )eight>$levation for the point to be sta5ed and enter the elevation to be used. Pressing the close dialog button will store the references.

St re P int . 103030 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . 2ata Ta& The data tab displays the sta5eout information pertaining to the sta5ed point. 9ayer Select the layer to which this point is to belong. Certical>Slant Specifies whether the entered antenna height is slant or vertical when performing #PS sta5ing.)ta6in. The code can be chosen from the list or entered manually. 2e'i$n PtA4a. )R or Ant )t The height of the target or #PS antenna used to sta5e the point. Name The name of the point that will be stored in the database.isplay Store Pt Info !hec5 this control to display the sta5ed point before storing it.isplays information regarding the Sta5e Point about to be stored and allows you to add or edit information. Select the code and attributes of the points. Sta9e Ta& The sta5e tab displays information regarding the sta5ed point about to be stored in the database.er . 9ayer Specifies the layer associated with the sta5ed point .

Off'et fr / CP *ffset from !P displays information about the offset from the catch point. Advance Specifies whether to advance to the ne t sta5e point location. ).ec SpecSpecifies the increment or decrement of the name of the ne t design point. !ode The feature code and attribute information associated with the point. Name The name of the point that will be stored. 2e'i$n Ta& The design tab displays information regarding the design point about to be stored in the database. !ut>%ill at !P wrt )P 103030 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Note Specifies the note associated with the point. Pt Inc>. !ut>%ill at *P wrt !P !ut>%ill between the !atch Point and the *ffset Point. *ffset from !P to *P )ori?ontal .)ta6in. This dialog appears after the point has been stored. String The string the feature code is associated with when the code type is a line or area. 9ayer Specifies the layer associated with the point.istance from the !atch Point to the *ffset Point.

!ut>%ill Slope . C. Slope . Select Dal!e The select value dialog allows you to select which values are to be displayed in the sta5e dialog. and the value you selected will now be displayed in the desired label.IP< is the point between the vertical line at the )inge point !ut>%ill slope at the *ffset Point. Intersection Point The Intersection Point . *ffset from )P to IP Certical . In the dialog.esign Slope between the )inge Point and the !atch Point.istance from the )inge Point to the Intersection Point. $levation $levation of the *ffset Point.)ele't Bal*e !ut>%ill between the )inge Point and the !atch Point.&=n< .ist from )P to IP Slope . only select the value you want displayed and press the green chec5 mar5 to e it the dialog. P/N 7010-0492 103131 .istance from the )inge Point to the Intersection Point. Iou will be returned to the stateout dialog.

Notes2 103232 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .)ta6in.

Photo 7ie'er Starts the Pictures D Cideos application to view the pictures attached to the current @ob. =e! 2ro'ser Starts Internet $ plorer to visit a web address you want. P/N 7010-0492 11-1 .C-a#te& 11 A##li'ations App' f lder Clic9 an ic n t !'e an applicati n &!ilt in . Files *pens %ile $ plorer to manage the files. !r de8ice: Ta3e Photo Starts the !amera application to ta5e pictures.

A##li'ations Notes2 11-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

After selecting the grid. select a desired grid.!entral<. "A#N$T %ield will display the point coordinates in the selected coordinate system. those algorithms of transformation. SP!4-'Te as . "A#N$T %ield will use its own mathematical algorithms to transform co' ordinates from the current system to the selected one. Set up 9ocali?ation for coordi' nate transformation from B#S4+ to #round . for e ample. which are applied to predefined or user'created grids and datums. in the !oordinate System screen. Bhen performing a tas5 of transformation of #PS pointsY coor' dinates measured in B#S4+ coordinate system into a #round coordinate system.s< collected on this grid can be transformed to any datum or any grid.North<. simply select a desired coordinate system. for e ' ample. Related topics= P/N 7010-0492 A-1 .atum predefined or created in "A#N$T %ield. a "A#N$T %ield @ob is configured for RT6 survey in a certain grid coordinate system. do not wor5. Point. SP!4-'Te as .and vise versa<. See an e ample of transformation into other grid coordinate system here. In this case "A#N$T %ield has no predefined relation between two coordinate systems.C-a#te& A "o4 To 4 caliBati n in MAGNET Field Bhen you need to obtain pointsY coordinates in different #rid co' ordinate systems or a . %or e amle. To do this.

"o4 To g g 0asic !oncept of 9ocali?ation 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on B#S4+ A-2 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

atum 9ocali?ation with any Predefined or !reated Pro@ection *ne'point 9ocali?ation Two'point 9ocali?ation Three'point 9ocali?ation Performing 9ocali?ation Importing 9ocali?ation . To perform locali?ation. hori?ontal locali?ation and vertical locali?a' tion are performed separately. An independent set of coordinates is a set of such point coordinates that do not have a relation between each other. you need to have two independent sets of coordinates for the same point or few points in the "A#' N$T %ield. See an e ample of using a locali?ation point in both locali?ations here.ata to *ther . "A#N$T %ield will cal' P/N 7010-0492 A-3 . coordinate system . Such a point is called 9ocali?ation Point. In the common case.ob 6a'ic C ncept f 4 caliBati n 9ocali?ation in "A#N$T %ield is a calculation of transforma' tion parameters between B#S4+ and a ground coordinate sys' tem.F"easured PointF< for the same point in the current @ob. In "A#N$T %ield.F6nown PointF< and in the #RI. coordinate system or B#S4+> .C-a#te& A g g g g g g g 9ocali?ation with Stereographic Pro@ection on any . you need to manu' ally select coordinates in the #R*2N. Iou determine which calculation the 9ocali?ation Point uses by selecting the corresponding chec5 bo es G2se )ori?ontalH and>or G2se CerticalH.AT2" coordinate system . when the customer selects three and more locali?ation points for the given "A#N$T %ield @ob and these points ta5e part in both locali?ations. To perform locali?ation in "A#N$T %ield.

2sing only the stereographic pro@ection on B#S4+ .) . rotation angle between these coordi' nate systems.. 2sing any predefined or created pro@ection . )y<. "A#N$T %ield will use this geoid for calculating orthometric elevations.<. -. !alculating orthometric elevations without a geoid for points in #round coordinate system can lead to errors in or' thometric elevations.<.A.. The current version of "A#N$T %ield enables you to perform the hori?ontal locali?ation in three ways= &.. . In the vertical plane ' one shift . and scale factor. 2sing only the stereographic pro@ection on any datum . Add the desired geoid for calculating orthometric elevations ..)*<.I< between the origins of coordinate systems. (.%ind out more..%ind out more. 4 caliBati n =ith Stere $raphic Pr <ecti n n 5GS-) If you perform a tas5 of transformation of B#S4+ coordinates into #round coordinates for a networ5 where the ma imum dis' A-4 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# ..%ind out more.<."o4 To culate and use seven parameters for transformation of all @ob points= In the hori?ontal plane . and two slopes .add geoid<.find out the plot here< ' offset vector .. If a geoid is set in the @ob.

set Pro@ection to None in the !oordinate System dialog before en' tering locali?ation point. 2at!/ If you 5now a datum for creating a local coordinate system.tance between the local points is less than / 5ilometers.atum'Q9ocal locali?ation type. . To do this type of locali?ation. In this case "A#N$T %ield will *N9I use an obliOue stereo' graphic map pro@ection on B#S'4+ as an intermediate step. In this case the 9ocali?ation screen will have two types in the Type field. you can use the simplest locali?ation. Predefined Created Pr <ecti n r If you have information about the pro@ection type for creating a local coordinate system. If you select . "A#N$T %ield will use an obliOue stereographic map pro@ec' tion on the selected .s<. and "A#' N$T %ield will use this pro@ection and corresponding datum in the process of calculation of locali?ation parameters.s<. In this case you select #rid'Q9ocal locali?ation type.atum as an intermediate step. you can select this datum in the !oordinate System dialog before se' lecting locali?ation point. 4 caliBati n =ith Stere $raphic Pr <ecti n n an. 4 caliBati n =ith an. The 9ocali?ation dialog will have only B#S4+'Q9ocal type in the Type field. you can select this pro@ection in the !o' ordinate System dialog before selecting locali?ation point.s<.

in the B#S4+ coordinate system< to the ground coordi' nate systems . and plot 0 displays a #PS networ5 in B#S' 4+ coordi' nate system.see our e ample here<. because co' ordinates of the F"easured PointF in the ground coordinate system are eOual to the coordinates of the F6nown PointF and vice versa . as soon as you add *N9I *N$ locali?ation point.for .rC< residuals for this locali?a' tion point are eOual to ?ero . Plot A displays a Total Station networ5 in the #round coordinate system.up to some hundred of 5ilometers depending on the type of the pro@ection< without loss in transformation precision. we will use points F!(F . In an e ' ample with one locali?ation point. This value is set to ?ero.see our e ample here<. The networ5s have some common points. "A#N$T %ield will transform measured points . One"p int l caliBati n To calculate 3 parameters between a datum and a local ground you have to select no less than + locali?ation points.see our e ample here<. )owever. The hori?ontal . "A#N$T %ield will calculate transformation parameters= only hori?ontal and vertical offsets between two coordinate systems and !ombined Scale factor. *nly in this case "A#N$T %ield will calculate all of the needed parameters and residuals for locali?ation for each point. This way enables you to increase the distance between locali?ation points . 2sing these parameters. Rotation between two coordinate systems cannot be computed.To calculate the locali?ation parameters between two coordinate systems is a more rigorous method than using the stereographic pro@ection for a un5nown local pro@ection. The com' ponents of the deflection of vertical are set to ?ero as well.r)< and vertical .

for #PS net' wor5<. if both the coordinate systems have non'?ero rotation angle. Three"p int 4 caliBati n As soon as you add T)R$$ locali?ation points "A#N$T %ield will calculate the hori?ontal .see our e ample here<= In our e ample with two locali?ation points.A. The hori?ontal .I< and vertical . we will use points F!(F and F!+F .see our e ample here<. The hori?ontal coordinates of the F"easured PointF in the ground coordinate system are eOual to the coordinates of the F6nown PointF and vice versa . scale factor.A. a?imuth . .Total Station networ5< and point F!'(fB#S'4+F . Plot ! shows that. ... .rotation<. T= "p int 4 caliBati n As soon as you add TB* locali?ation points.. 0ut the components of deflection of vertical are set to ?ero.for Total Station networ5< and points F!' (fB#S'4+F and F!'+fB#S'4+F .)< offsets. and components of the deflec' tion of vertical . "A#N$T %ield will calculate the hori?ontal .rC< residuals for these locali?ation points are calculated . Two points of locali?ation are enough to calculate all transformation parameters in the hori?ontal plane.see our e ample here<.rotation< and scale factor . a?imuth . the accuracy of transformation with only one lo' cali?ation point can be very poor.I< and vertical . The vertical .r)< residuals for these points are not calculated and set to ?ero.see our e ample here<.. %ind an e ample of two'point locali?ation with non'?ero rotation here.for #PS networ5<.)< offsets.

The error of converting coordi' nates from B#S4+ into F-& 2T" I#NF should not e ceed / cm.for Spain<. See a map of the pro@ect here. The coordinates of the benchmar5s are 5nown and given in the F-& 2T" I#NF for the corresponding datum F$2R*/8fI#NDP-7M.rC< residuals for these points are not calculated and eOual ?ero . Perf r/in$ 4 caliBati n 9earn locali?ation on a practical e ample.in our case. g g g 2ser Tas5 0efore Rover "easurements After Rover "easurements (ser Tas3 In the field you will measure a set of points from several bench' mar5s.r)< residuals for these locali?ation points are calculated.Also. The rover points will be determined from the nearest base station in the RT6 mode. Three points of locali?ation are enough to calcu' late all transformation parameters in the vertical plane. but obtains the errors . The ver' tical .see our e ample here<. The ma imum and minimum distance between two benchmar5s is &&+ and &1 5ilometers. All #PS measurements are performed in the B#S4+ coordinate system. The user tries to apply the transformation algorithms for pre' defined grids and datums in "A#N$T %ield . respectively. All rover points need to have the coordinates in pro@ec' tion F-& 2T" I#NF . the hori?ontal . be' tween B#S4+ and F-& 2T" I#NF<. %ive different benchmar5s are used as base stations for this pro@ect.

more .

and only need to import this set to a "A#N$T %ield @ob. #iven the long distances between the benchmar5s. The first set is a set of the benchmar5s coordinates in the F-& 2T" I#NF. 2e$ore -o+er )easurements To preform locali?ation. you need two sets of the coordinates. the user car' ries out measurements of all five points simultaneously within three hours. The user decides to use locali?ation in "A#N$T %ield. Such an error of benchmar5s coor' dinates in B#S4+ allows the user to convert coordinates from B#S4+ into F-& 2T" I#NF with the error not e ceeding / cm. This set will be used as a set of #R*2N. In our e ample. and the errors of both sets are of eOual accuracy. The second set is a set of the coordinates of the benchmar5s in B#S4+ coordinate system.than 48 cm for plane coordinates and more than & meter for ele' vation for this networ5. N*T$= The error of converting coordinates from B#S4+ into F-& 2T" I#NF depends on the errors of two coordinate sets and the way of transformation in "A#N$T %ield. we do not have this set and we need to obtain this data. If we assume that transformation in "A#N$T %ield does not bring an additional error. The user has this data. coordi' nates. See the ad@usted networ5 of benchmar5s here. . Then raw data collected from five receivers is im' ported to "A#N$T Tools software for post processing and ad' @ustment. then we obtain the errors of the benchmar5s coordinates in B#S4+ less than .

Importing the B#S4+ set Importing the #round set To import the B#S4+ set of ad@usted coordinates . !lic5 the Save button and select the de' sired 9at>9on type in the !ustom %ormat Properties window. if you 5now the format of the file. The user e ports these coordinates . I/p rtin$ the c rdinate 'et' t MAGNET Field < & After obtaining the both .sssF type for 9at> 9on coordinates.see the results here<.from the "A#N$T Tools @ob< in te t file format and selects Fdd mm ss.the 9at>9on> ) file< to the "A#N$T %ield @ob= . and &1 mm in height. See an e ample of creating a file of B#S4+ coordinates in "A#N$T Tools here The user imports these coordinates to a created "A#N$T %ield @ob. To obtain this file clic5 .The error of ad@usted coordinates does not e ceed &( mm in plane. These ad@usted coordinates can be used as= g g !oordinates of the base stations to wor5 in RT6 mode. that meet the specified accuracy of transformed coordinates . Set of coordinates in B#S4+ for locali?ation.ob'Q$ port and select !ustom Te t %ormat in the $ port window. you can import these sets to a created "A#N$T %ield @ob. because "A#N$T %ield supports this type.B#S4+ and #round< sets of coordi' nates.

See the original file of the benchmar5s coordinates in the F-& 2T" I#NF pro@ection here. set of coordinates to the current @ob. A1010 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . Navigate to the desired file in the %rom Te t screen and clic5 .F-& 2T" I#NF pro@ection< coordinate system during the import procedure. !lic5 the $ change icon and then %rom %ile . 4. N*T$= %or locali?ation to wor5 properly the user S)*29.9at>9on>$ll ht< co' ordinate type of the imported file in the !oordinate Sys' tem screen and clic5 Ne t. (. The ne t step is to import a #R*2N. -.&. 3. +. Select the B#S4+ datum and B#S4+. I"' P*RT these points as points in #R*2N. Select the format of 9at>9on in the 2nits %ormat dialog and clic5 . coordinate system and should not indicate the #RI. In the %rom %ile screen. . 1. /.see the file creat' ed in "A#N$T Tools here< in the Te t %ile %ormat and clic5 Ne t. select the Topcon Te t !ustom file format and clic5 Ne t to continue importing. The Import Status screen displays the import successfully finishes. Select the comma delimiter for this file . The Point screen displays the coordinates of the B#S4+ set.

-. &. in the %rom %ile.&. coordinate type in the !oordinate System dialog to import the set of these coordinates. Se' lect the pro@ection here. (. In the !o' ordinate System dialog. To import this file into the "A#N$T %ield @ob.efined panel of the Pro@ections dialog. (. After the import finishes successfully. which will be used in local' i?ation. Then this pro@ection appears in the list of pro@ections.U. !lic5 the arrow to move the pro@ection to the Active panel and clic5 to close the screen. Addin$ the Ge id file The last thing you can do before starting field measurements of the rover points is to add the corresponding geoid file. we select the FN$E. Select the #R*2N. clic5 in the Pro@ection line and navigate to the corresponding pro@ection in the Pre'. +. !lic5 the !onfigure icon and then the !oordinate System icon . -. To add a desired pro@ection to the list of pro@ections in the !oordinate System dialog. Settin$ the de'ired pr <ecti n Then you need to set the pro@ection.csv<F format. the Point screen displays the coordinates of both sets. clic5 P/N 7010-0492 in the #eoid line and clic5 A1111 .

"A#N$T %ield will use the ste' A1212 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . -. co' ordinate system. Perform the above steps and add three more locali?ation points. *N9I for T$ST. All mea' sured rover points. See an e ample of adding the appropriate geoid file here. %$ter -o+er )easurements Then you measure all rover points from the corresponding base stations. located inside the polygon formed by the benchmar5s.Add. Iou can see on the 9ocali?ation dialog. and after completing all measurements. !lic5 Setup and then 9ocali?ation . perform local' i?ation to transform rover points from B#S4+ coordinate sys' tem to #round coordinate system. After clic5ing on the Add 9ocali?ation dialog. to add the corresponding file. Then select a point in the B#S4+ coordinate system from the list. In the same e ample. 3. !lic5 Add and select a point in the #round coordinate sys' tem from the list. the 9ocali?ation dialog displays the first locali?ation point. (. that the hori?ontal and vertical residuals for locali?ation points are not more than 1 mm and &8 mm. respectively. The Points screen displays all points in the #R*2N. +. select the B#S4+' Q#round type of locali?ation. In the given case the ground coordinate system matches the F-& 2T" I#NF pro@ection. have the same error of transformation from B#S4+ into the #round coordinate system. !hec5 that the type of locali?ation is #rid'Q9ocal. Creatin$ 4 caliBati n P int' &. 1. /.

7 meters . to save the changes and -. select FAlways importF and clic5 close the window.ob and then New .obs tab of the #lobal Settings dialog. +. P/N 7010-0492 A1313 . This time the error of transfor' mation will be more than &. (. $nter the @ob name and clic5 to finish the configuration.ob . clic5 . "A#N$T %ield automatically e ports the locali?ation data from the previous @ob to the current @ob.reographic pro@ection on B#S4+. clic5 !onfigure and then #lobal . &. In the @ob that contains locali?ation data. %or this. Then create a new @ob. you can activate automatic import procedure of locali?ation data to a @ob. I/p rtin$ 4 caliBati n 2ata t % & Other If you want to import locali?ation data from one @ob to other @ob.in hori?ontal locali?ation< for such distances between the locali?ation points. In the New .

-. To get started with transformation= &. *nly after selecting the pro@ection the option of #rid to #round transformation will become available. (. *ne method per' forms scaling and rotation relative to some point of the @ob. !lic5 the !onfigure icon and then the !oordinate System icon . Press to select a desired transformation method .from F*rigin PtF. FAvg . To activate the #rid to #round . %ind out more= !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to a Point !reating #round Pro@ection Relative to the *rigin of #rid Sys' tem A1414 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .or vice versa< transforma' tion select the 2se #rid>#round chec5 bo . The other method performs scaling and rotation relative to the origin of the #rid coordinate system. Select the desired pro@ection through which the lin5 will be found with some #round coordinate system.ob )tF and FScale %actorF< and set the corresponding parameters for this method.Grid t Gr !nd Tran'f r/ati n "A#N$T %ield supports two methods for setting the relation between #rid and #round coordinate systems. +.

to sta5e a point at the distance of &88 meters from some point. See the plot here. P/N 7010-0492 A1010 . se' lect the corresponding #rid and enter the average height of a de' sired portion of the road. select F*rigin PtF from the Parameters list on the #rid>#round Parameters screen.called the origin point< in the grid and ground coordinate systems and compute the ground co' ordinates from the grid coordinates using this offset.#rid and #round< and also rotation of these systems. This method calculates an offset vector in the hori?ontal plane between coordinates of a point . The created ground coordinate system enables you to sta5e points at special distances in the grid sys' tem. Creatin$ Gr !nd Pr <ecti n 1elati8e t a P int If you 5now the coordinates of a point in both coordinate sys' tems . %or e ample. then to find the relation between #rid to #round coordinate systems. you have to create a ground coordinate system. "A#N$T %ield will calculate ground coordinates from the grid coordinate system and vice versa. See an e ample of using this method below.G&i to G&o*n T&ansfo&+ation Parameters of transformation from the #rid to #round coordi' nates can be used in #PS sta5e of road points. To do this. Also "A#N$T %ield ta5es into account a scale factor between these coordinate systems. "A#N$T %ield can rotate a grid or ground coordinate system relative to this point. After determining the relation between both coordinate systems. which will wor5 as a base coordinate system in #PS sta5e calculation. If a rotation angle is present between these coordinate systems.

To perform #rid to #round transformation for these networ5s= &. The a?imuths of this line in different networ5s will be used for calculation of the rota' tion angle between both coordinate systems.North<.SP!4.receiver from a reference station in #rid coordinate system. A1111 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .'*hio. SP!4. and the line between !P(fTS and !P1fTS of the TS networ5. !lic5 .' *hio."o4 To Exa/ple f !'in$ GOri$in PtG The current "A#N$T %ield @ob contains two sets of measured points= g g *ne networ5 of points measured by a #R'.North<< in the Pro@ection field of the !oordinate System screen. select the desired #rid system . This point is the origin point for our transformation. for e ample. A common line ' the line between !P( and !P1 points of the #PS networ5.#TS'((8< in the #round coordinate system with the arbitrary choice of ?ero 0S a?imuth. See "ap Ciew for the different networ5s here. Another networ5 of points measured by a Topcon Total Station . These networ5s have= g g A common point ' the point !P( of the #PS networ5 and point !P(fTS of the TS networ5.

Remove the coordinates of the selected point in the fields Northing and $asting. Select F*rigin PtF in the Parameters field to activate this method.and vice versa< ta5ing into account the scale factor. g !ombines the #PS point with the TS point.the line !P(fTS ' !P1fTS<. which "A#N$T %ield automati' cally writes in the #rid coordinate system. g Performs grid to ground transformation . !lic5ing in the #rid>#round Parameters screen= g !alculates a combined scale factor for this point. P/N 7010-0492 A1717 . Type in the values of the #round coordinates of the origin point . !hec5 the 2se #rid > #round bo to use this transforma' tion. -. After that. To ta5e into account the rotation between these two networ5s in this transformation= &. and. the TS point will have hori?ontal coordinates of the corresponding #PS point. the #PS point will have hori?ontal coordinates of the corre' sponding TS point.G&i to G&o*n T&ansfo&+ation (. the grid a?imuth is set by direction of the line !P( ' !P1. /.see the #rid>#round Parameters screen here<. The "ap displays the networ5s either in the #round or #rid co' ordinate system. in the #rid coordinate sys' tem. As we see from "ap Ciew for the different networ5s. in the #round coordinate system. 3. and the ground a?imuth is set by direction of the same line in ground coordinate system .!P( point< from the list. 1. Select the origin point in the #rid coordinate system . +. and press to open the #rid>#round Parameters screen.

The #rid to #round transformation is successfully per' formed. !lic5 in the A?imuth Rotation field. In the !ompute A?imuth screen.'te/ If you 5now the value of the scale factor between grid and ground coordinate systems or the average height of the networ5. (. 3.see #rid to #round Transformation Bithout Rotation<.see here<. The #rid>#round Parameters screen contains all needed values to calculate the relation between the #rid and #round coordinate systems . !lic5 in this screen. %ind a plot here that displays the error of transfor' mation ta5ing into account the scale factor and rotation for the given e ample. +. A1515 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . select the corresponding points . !lic5 to save this calculation.that define the common line in the #round coordinate system< from the list. In the !om' pute A?imuth screen. 1. !lic5 the !ompute button in the #rid line.that de' fine the common line in the #rid coordinate system< from the list. The !ompute Rotation screen allows calculating #rid and #round a?i' muth to obtain rotation angle between two coordinate sys' tems . select the corresponding points . The final rotation angle between two coordinate systems for our e ample is displayed in the Rotation field. Creatin$ Gr !nd Pr <ecti n 1elati8e t the Ori$in f Grid S. /. !lic5 the !ompute button in the #round line."o4 To "A#N$T %ield calculates the corresponding a?imuth when you select the start and end points of the line. -.

-adius.. %ind graphic e plaination of transformation only by scaling here. and select the correct direction . The Scale %actor will be automatically calculated from= Scale. (...8 m -. This method calculates plane ground coordinates by scaling. In both cases you can enter the rotation and offsets= g If the angle of rotation is 5nown.in%.t) Mean. off' setting. only by ratating here.-adius c 1-3&888.Eart. "A#N$T %ield performs rotation of the #round relative to the ori' gin of the #rid coordinate system.#rid to #round or #round to #rid< for this value.ob )tF. select FScale factorF in the #rid>#round Parameters screen.Factor E +7$ Av%' ob 0ei%.Eart. If the scale factor is 5nown. in the #rid>#round Parameters screen.ob )eight field. To find a relation between #rid and #round coordinate systems= &. type in the desired plane offsets on the Northing *ffset and $asting *ffset fields.&!!set and P/N 7010-0492 A1919 .. type in this value into the A?imuth Rotation field. where Mean.ob )eightF in the #rid>#round Parameters screen and type in the desired value of the height in the Avg. you can select FScale %actorF or FAvg . g To shift the #round system from the selected #rid.. and rotating grid coordinates. select FAvg. The final coordinates in the #round will be calculat' ed from= N%roundEN%rid$Nort. type in a desired value. and only by shifting here.G&i to G&o*n T&ansfo&+ation then. If the average height of the networ5 is 5nown.

"o4 To E%roundEE%rid$Eastin%.&!!set A2020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .

"o4 To Off'et' in MAGNET Field Bhen surveying with #PS receivers and Total Stations .istance *ffset )idden Point Two 9ines Intersection 9ines and !orner A2020 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# . select the *ptical device type in the !onnections dialog.irect measurement method. If performing a survey with a #PS receiver.irect screen to enable determination of any of eight types of offset points. If performing a survey with a TS instrument. Off'et' f r TS S!r8e. The *ffset tab will additionally display in the Sideshot'. F ll = the lin9 t find !t / re: )ori?ontal Angle *ffset )ori?ontal>Certical Angle *ffset . Select this method for the Topo survey in the Survey Parameters. select the #PS de' vice type in the !onnections dialog. *ffset points are available for surveying only for the Sideshot' . you may determine points using different types of offsets.TS<.

irect screen.< coordinates of an inaccessible center of pipe > tree > pillar using distance and angle measurements. Ta5e two measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the Side button. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. !lic5 the !enter button. and measure the distance and hori?ontal angle to the side of the pipe > tree > pillar. To do this determination= &. (. The prism is lo' cated on the side of the pipe > tree > pillar.(.etermination of hor' i?ontal . Note= The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta' . (< Iou can see the plot of measurements for the )ori?ontal Angle *ffset here. The "easurement tab displays.Offsets in MAGNET Fiel 9ine and *ffset Plane and !orner H riB ntal An$le Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . -. and measure the hori?ontal angle to the center of the pipe > tree > pillar. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.

"o4tion' To Prism at the Prism point. .

$nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.cen' ter< point. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets.< coordinates of an inaccessible point distance and angle measurements. -.-. and measure the hori?ontal and vertical angle to the inac' cessible point. Note= The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta' tion' Prism at the Prism point. !lic5 the )A>CA button. The vertical measurements to this offset point are not considered. To do this determination= &. and )offset c )side H riB ntalADertical An$le Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . Ta5e two measurements in the following order= &< !lic5 the Prism button.The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset . The "easurement tab displays. .etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . The prism is located near the inaccessible point.irect screen. (< Iou can see the plot of measurements for the )ori?ontal>Certi' cal Angle *ffset here. (. and measure the distance and hori?ontal angle to the prism.

istance *ffsets screen. .The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset point. Then measure offsets from the Prism to the determined point and enter their values in the corresponding fields of the $nter . %or instance. Iou can define the di' rection of the given offset in two ways= either clic5 on the button of the current selection or use the minus sign F'F for the current value.< coordinates of an inaccessible point using distance and angle measurements. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'. and directions are the same. 2i'tance Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .-. To do this determination= &. and additional distance offsets measurements.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . in the -. The "easurement tab displays. (. for e ample performed with the tape. !lic5 to ta5e mea' surements to the Prism. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 *ff' sets.irect screen. +. The directions of the offsets are e plained in the figure that you can find here.

The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point. !lic5 the Prism( icon and measure the dis' tance. Ta5e two measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the Prism& icon and measure the dis' tance.< coordinates of an inaccessible point using distance and angle measurements to two prisms located on the rod.-.irect screen. Note (= )offsetfpoint c )prismfpoint : . (. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second prism of the rod. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'. -.ownfoffset<.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . $nter the distance from the rodJs bottom to Prism ( in the )R field. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first prism of the rod. +. Hidden P int Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . . *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets.2p>. The "easurement tab displays. (< %ind the plot of measurements for the )idden Point *ffset here.Note &= The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta' tion' Prism.

from which the desired inaccessible offset point is seen. (. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'. To do this offset determination= &. in the . respectively.Pt&'( and Pt('(< along the lines FPt&' & ' offset pointF and FPt('& ' offset pointF. Set two more points .< coordinates of an inaccessible point.-. complete the following preparation tas5s= &. (. bear in mind that the internal angle formed by the two lines should not be less than -8 degrees and more than &/8 degrees. Bhen selecting the location of these points. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 *ff' sets.The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset . See the plot here.irect screen.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . Select any two points . as intersection of two au iliary lines.Pt&'& and Pt('&<. 0efore performing any measurements. T= 4ine' Inter'ecti n Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .by two points< and perform distance and angle measurements of the lineJs points. See the plot here. Iou create these lines .hid' den< point.

Note &= The height of the prism for all measured points is un' available in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5' sight screen. The "easurement tab displays. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the first line. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the second line. Note (= The height of the offset point is calculated as the mean of the heights of both lines for this point= see the graph here. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the second line.in' tersection< point. !lic5 the 9ine(Pt( icon and measure the distance. . Ta5e four measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the 9ine&Pt& button and measure the distance.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical .-.-. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the first line. 4ine and C rner Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . !lic5 the 9ine(Pt& button and measure the distance. (< -< +< Iou can see the plot of measurements for the Two 9ines Inter' section *ffset here.< coordinates of an inaccessible point. !lic5 the 9ine&Pt( button and measure the distance. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset .

*pen the *ffset tab and clic5 *ff' sets. Bhen selecting the location of these points. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'. -. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the line. (. !lic5 the 9ine&Pt( button and measure the distance. bear in mind that the internal angle formed by the two lines should not be less than -8 degrees and more than &/8 degrees. . (. Ta5e three measurements in any order= &< in the (< -< !lic5 the 9ine&Pt& button and measure the distance. !lic5 the !orner button and measure the vertical and hori?ontal angle to the offset point. from which the desired inaccessible offset point is seen. complete the following preparation tas5s= &. 0efore any measurements. Set point Pt('( along the line FPt('& ' the offset pointF and set up the TS at point Pt&'&. Iou create a line .irect screen. The "easurement tab displays.as intersection an au iliary line and a plane. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the line.Pt&'& and Pt('&<. To do this offset determination= &.by two points< and a vertical plane passing through the offset point. Then you perform distance and angle measurements of the lineJs points and angle measurements of the offset point. Select any two points . See the plot here. See the plot here.

irect screen.< coordinates of an inaccessible point. you have to select any two points . The line which is created by these points will be an au iliary line. To do this offset determination= &. 4ine and Off'et Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . then perform distance and angle measurements of the lineJs points and distance measurements . The height of the offset point is the height of the line for this offset point . Note (. The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset point. 0efore any measurements.Iou can see the plot of measurements for the 9ine and !orner *ffset here.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . Iou create a line . See the plot here. using an au iliary line and additional distance offsets measure' ments.by two points<.Pt& and Pt(< near the inaccessible point.calculated by e trapolation along the GPt(' & ' Pt('(H line<. Note &= The height of the prism for all measured points is un' available in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5' sight screen.-. .from this line< to the offset point. for e ample made by the tape. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'.

Note (= *ffset point lies on the perpendicular to the line FPt& ' Pt(F. %or instance. -. Note &= The height of the prism for all measured points is un' available in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5' sight screen. The "easurement tab displays. (< +.Pt(< to the de' termined point and enter their values in the following fields of the $nter . The directions of the offsets are e plained in the figure here. Ta5e two measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the 9inePt& button and measure the distance. !lic5 the 9inePt( button and measure the distance. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ff' sets. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second point of the line.calculated by e trapolation along the FPt& ' Pt(F line<. Iou may de' fine the direction of the given offset in two ways= either clic5 on the button of the current selection or use the mi' nus sign F'F for the current value. "easure the offsets from the second point .(. . coordinates of the offset point are calculated relative to line GPt& ' Pt(H . vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first point of the line. Note -= -.istance *ffsets screen. and directions are the same.

(< A3030 MAGNET Fiel 1!0 "el# .irect screen. !lic5 the Prism( button and measure the distance. All four points must not be on the same line. *pen the *ffset tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the second prism of the plane. The "easurement tab displays. as intersection of a line of site and a plane defined by three points.The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point. Ta5e four measurements in any order= &< !lic5 the Prism& button and measure the distance. %ind the plot here.< coordinates of an inaccessible point.-. vertical and hori?ontal angle to the first prism of the plane. To do this determination= &. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the "easurement tab of the Sideshot'. Plane and C rner Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . (. Iou create three au iliary points.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . -. Note that the user creates three au iliary points in the same plane where the inaccessible point is located. then perform distance and angle measurements to these points and angle measurements to the offset point.

Note= The height of the prism for all measured points is unavail' able in the "easurement tab and should be set in the 0ac5sight screen.-< +< !lic5 the Prism. F ll = the lin9 t find !t / re: *ffset 9ine A?imuth and *ffsets *ffset 9aser P/N 7010-0492 A3131 . vertical and hori?ontal angle to the third prism of the plane. The *ffset 9aser is available only if a laser distance meter device is used. Iou can see the plot of measurements for the Plane and !orner *ffset here. &. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point. The *ffsets tab is always presented when you open the Topo screen for the #PS survey. The *ffsets tab contains up to three offset types.button and measure the distance. Off'et' f r GPS S!r8e. !lic5 the !orner button and measure the vertical and hori?ontal angle to the offset point.

clic5 or from the list . The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point. Note= 0e sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the determined point. The directions of the offsets are e plained in the figure here. in the < -.clic5 < in the 9ine screen. .clic5 <. /.< coordinates of an inaccessible point. *pen the *ffsets tab and clic5 *ffsets. or measure them . (.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . Select the Start and $nd points from the map . performed with the tape. +. using two measured points and additional distance offsets mea' surements. 2se one of two ways to define the direction of the given offset= either clic5 on the button of the current selection or use the minus sign F'F for the current value .Off'et 4ine Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . To do this determination= &. !lic5 to save the calculated coordinates of the offset point.see e amples here<. for e ample.-. $nter the name of the determined point and the rover an' tenna height in the Point field of the Topo tab. "easure offsets from the $nd point to the determined point and enter the values.

Note= 0e sure that the current type of position calculation method corresponds to the precision of the determined point.ownfoffset< ABi/!th and Off'et' Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' .clic5 <. )offsetfpoint c )point( : . using one measured point and distance and angle measurements from this point to the offset point.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . Select Start Point from the map . To determine a point with the A?imuth D *ffsets tas5= &.-. +. -. 2se one of two methods to de' . (. Type the name of determined point and the rover antenna height in the Point field of the Topo tab. *pen the *ffsets tab and clic5 the *ffsets.efine the direction to the offset point in the A?imuth ' .2p>.The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line FStart Point ' $nd PointF.istance ' )eight screen.< coordinates of an inaccessible point. or measure it .clic5 < in the 9ine screen. .clic5 in < or from the list .

%ind the plot here. 2se one of three methods to define the offset point in a vertical plane . . The vertical distance between the offset point and the hori' ?ontal passed through the start point.from an inde with 8 derected towards the ?enith<. %ind the plot here. %ind the plot here.the hand symbol points out that there is a choice<= &< The ?enith angle is measured .the hand symbol points out that there is a choice<= &< The hori?ontal angle is determined by the a?imuth to the offset point. (< -< 1. %ind the plot here.selected from the list>map<.relative to 8 that coincides with hori?ontal<. %ind the plot here.istance ' )eight screen.fine the offset point in hori?ontal plane .is' tance ' )eight screen. The vertical angle is measured . (< /. The offset point lies on the line FStart PointF' FSelected PointF. "easure the vertical offset from the Start Point and enter the value in the corresponding field of the A?imuth ' . "easure the hori?ontal distance offset from the Start Point and enter the value in the corresponding field of the A?i' muth ' . The hori?ontal angle is determined by the a?imuth to a point .

< coordinates of an inaccessible point. ma5e sure that the current coordinate system in the given "A#N$T %ield @ob is datum. /. "a5e sure that the @ob contains the coordinates of the point where the laser rangefinder will be located. !lic5 the !onfigure icon (. To wor5 with an e ternal laser rangefinder= &. grid.-. Off'et 4a'er Bhat tas5 does this offset type performS' . The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point. select which device to connect the laser rangefinder to= !ontroller or Receiver. !lic5 Parameters in the Peripherals dialog to set commu' nication parameters between the controller and e ternal laser rangefinder. !lic5 in the Rover Receiver screen. +. This point is called F*cc pointF for this offset type. 0efore starting measurements with the laser rangefinder. set the type of the used rangefinder in @ob configuration. using distance and angle measurements to the point from a laser rangefinder. "A#N$T %ield enables you to use an e ternal la' ser rangefinder. !lic5 the Survey icon . .3. 3.etermination of the hori?ontal and vertical . -. !lic5 to calculate and save the coordinates of the offset point. 0efore any measurement. or locali?ation. 1. . !hec5 the $ ternal laser option.

if is selected<. $nter the name of the determined point in the Point field of the Topo tab. &&. After measurements are successfully performed. *pen the *ffsets tab and clic5 in the *ffsets. &8.$nter the laser rangefinder height in the corresponding field. &+.clic5 < or from the list . "A#N$T %ield displays the Store Point screen with the calculated coordinates of the offset point. .if is se' lected<. %ind the plot here.!lic5 to save the offset point in the "A#N$T %ield @ob.Select the *ccupation Point from the map . The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.Select the name of the e ternal laser rangefinder from the list in the 0luetooth . &-.4. %ind the plot here. The offset point will be on the line F*ccupation PointF' FSelected PointF.evices screen. 7.$ither enter the a?imuth to the offset point .*r select a point from the list>map . In this case the hori?ontal angle will be deter' mined by the a?imuth to the selected point. !lic5 in the dialog. &1. &(.Sight the laser to the desired point and press the %ire but' ton on the laser rangefinder to measure the slope distance and vertical angle to the point.clic5 < in the !onfig 9aser screen. &/.